Manual Corredera

Consilium
SAL T2
Manual
Article No. 702270 I1
Included options:
Section 17
:...................................
Section 18
Order-specific pages, order #: ...................................
Consilium Marine & Safety AB P.O. Box 5021 SE-131 05 NACKA SWEDEN
Phone +46-(0)8-563 051 00 Fax +46-(0)8-563 051 99 E-mail: [email protected]
Consilium
SAL T2 Manual
2 (9)
Art No. 702271 I1
Consilium
SAL T2 Manual
Art No. 702271 I1
Table of Contents
Section
Description
1 Introduction
2 Technical Description
3 Technical Specification
4 Installation of Transducer and Bottom Parts
5 Installation of Electronics Unit
6 Log Processing Unit LPU2
7 SAL SD4 Serial Digital Display
8 Analogue Indicator SIA-2-8
9 SAL T2 system drawings
10 SAL T2+ system drawings
11 IEC 61162 / NMEA 0183, Users guide
12 SAL BTU (Bottom Track Unit) Menu System
13 SAL WTU (Water track Unit) Menu System
14 Harbour Acceptance test
15 Calibration and Sea acceptance tests
16
17
18
19 Ship Equipment Spec., test documents
20 Installation and service reports
3 (9)
Doc ID
702271
702273
702274
701618
702313
704531
704005
701402
703270
703280
700164
703258
702314
703254
703255
N/A
N/A
Consilium
1.
SAL T2 Manual
Art No. 702271 I1
Introduction
The purpose of this manual is to fulfil the needs for normal installation, commissioning, everyday use and also to give enough guidance for ships crew and local service agents to pinpoint
faulty sub-unit.
We would appreciate all comments from readers and users that would help us to improve this
manual.
Consilium Marine & Safety AB
4 (9)
Consilium
SAL T2 Manual
Art No. 702271 I1
SAL T2 Acoustic Correlation Dual Speed Log

System Description
The SAL T2 measures relative speed as well as two-axis bottom track speed in a combined
transducer. The SAL T2 system is based on the SAL T-series speed log.
Two different versions of the SAL T2 ELC is available: the standard SAL T2 or the SAL T2+
version. The SAL T2+ version has a built-in power supply separation between the STW and
SOG part of the ELC. Apart from the separation they are identical.
The data obtained from the SAL T2 and SAL T2+ are:
a) Longitudinal bottom track speed (= SOG longitudinal)
b) Transversal bottom track speed (= SOG transversal)
c) Longitudinal water track speed (= STW)

d) Docking log (if an optional Rate of Turn gyro is connected to the system)
LPU2 - Log Processing Unit
The LPU2 is mounted on the bridge and receives the NMEA message from the T2 ELC. The
LPU2 has various options to perform message conversion and calculations and has also variety
of inputs for taking data from other units. Outputs available are serial (NMEA), contact relays,
opto-couplers and analogue output. The LPU2 can also take data from a connected turn-rate
gyro. If the docking log option in the LPU2 is enabled, the data from the log and the gyro are
combined to create also docking log information that can be used by the docking log display
SD4-5 .
SD4 - Serial Digital Indicators

The SAL SD4 series of indicators are versatile instruments used primarily as a display to
indicate speed, distance and depth. It can also be used to remotely control such equipment,
which is not easily accessible or has no user interface, for example a SAL speed log or SAL
LPU2.
TRU - Transducer
The combined transducer is mounted in a sea valve arrangement suitable both for single and
double bottom design. The transducer incorporates as standard a 30 metres cable for
connection to the electronics unit (ELC). Both speed and depth are measured with this one
combined transducer that is equipped with separate crystals for bottom measurement (5 off) as
well as for water track measurement (2 off).
5 (9)
Consilium
SAL T2 Manual
1. Block diagram
Typical block diagram for a SAL T2, 2-axis configuration:
Optional indicators on Grey background
6 (9)
Art No. 702271 I1
Consilium
SAL T2 Manual
Typical block diagram for a SAL T2, Docking configuration:
Optional indicators on Grey background .

Rate of Turn gyro signal from external installation.
7 (9)
Art No. 702271 I1
Consilium
SAL T2 Manual
Art No. 702271 I1
2. List of a SAL T2 / SAL T2+ system

Items necessary for a system
Unit number
702200 or
702200-10
704500
704400
(71-22188-00)
71-22190-00
704042
Name of unit
SAL T2 ELC
SAL T2+ ELC
LPU2
TRU-2-2
MSSBSV
SD4-2
Description
Log main unit (ELC = Electronics Cabinet)
Log Processing Unit, second generation
Transducer w. 30m cable
Mounting Set Single Bottom w. Sea Valve
Serial Digital SOG/STW speed, total/trip distance.
Also used as a remote log control unit,
Speed Log Master Display
Items optional for a system

Unit number
704044
704045
Name of unit
SD4-4
SD4-5
Description
Serial Digital General instrument
SD4, Serial Digital SOG/STW, Docking log Display
704080
704090
704110
704120
704130
701219E
71-21049-17
71-71091-00
704100
(71-22188-40)
71-22191-00
71-19839-xx
SD4 BMB
SD4SA
SD4EB
SD4ED
SDR2
SDP
SIA-2-8 AN.SPEED
EXT DIM TYPE SIA
TRU2-2
Bulhead mounting box SD4

Stand Alone mounting box SD4
Extension board SD4
External dimmer SD4
Remote control SD4
Serial Display external Power
Analogue indicator, -8 +30kt
External dimmer for SIA analogue indicator
Transducer w. 40m cable
MSDBSV
Connecting Tube
Mounting Set Double Bottom w. Sea Valve (option)

For MSDBSV, xx-Length depending on installation
8 (9)
Text for back of binder:
Consilium
SAL T2 Log System Manual, U/N 702270 I
Intentionally blank
Consilium
SAL T-series
Consilium
Technical
Description
Article No. 702273
Consilium
SAL T-series Technical Description
Art No. 702273C5
Contents:
1
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
SPEED OVER GROUND MEASUREMENT
2.1
Acoustic transmission/reception
2.2
Depth measurement
2.2.1 Seek mode
2.2.2 Lock mode
5
5
5
2.3
Speed measurement
2.3.1 Speckle pattern
2.3.2 Correlation technique
6
6
11
SPEED THROUGH WATER MEASUREMENT
12
3.1
12
3.2
Signal processing
13
3.3
Correlation functions
3.3.1 Boundary layer and calibration
14
15
3.4
Sampling control
3.4.1 Transmit pulse
3.4.2 Echo time
3.4.3 Integration time
3.4.4 How to interpret the signals received
3.4.5 Digital filtering
16
16
17
17
17
18
3.5
Speed filtering
19
3.6
Distance calculation
19
3.7
Adverse conditions
19
3.8
WTU user interface
20
3.9
Software
3.9.1 Power on / software update
3.9.2 Normal operation
3.9.3 Menu system
20
20
20
23
TRANSDUCER TRU-2-2
24
ELC - ELECTRONICS UNIT
25
5.1
BTU-PCB
26
5.2
WTU-PCB
26
2 (26)
Consilium
5.3
Art No. 702273C5
Data transmission / reception
Revisions:
Date
2003-04-24
2003-09-10
2003-10-15
Version
A0
A1
A2
Author
NE
RB
JKW/OM
2004-03-03
2004-09-24
2005-02-21
2007-09-18
B0
B1
C0
C1
HW
UH
JL
RB
2007-12-13
C2
HW
2008-02-08
2009-03-10
2010-04-29
C3
C4
C5
RB
OM
OM
26
Comment
Created from 703251A3
WTU/RSC PCB and connection diagram
Corrected some picture and added the SAL T3
ELC number
Changed to be general for all T-series
WTU card added in electrical connection dwg.
Changed for T-M motherboard.
Added NMEA messages on serial ports (chapter
5.3)
Terminal 102/103 VDVLW message removed
from table page 26
Updated picture on page 25
Correspond to IEC62288, SOG, STW
Company name changed, corrections
3 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
Principle of operation
The SAL T-Series Log system (incl. SAL T1, SAL T2, SAL T2s, SAL T2+, SAL T3 ) is
actually two more or less independent log systems, one for sensing speed over ground (SOG),
Bottom Track Unit, (BTU), and the other for sensing speed through water (STW), Water
Track Unit (WTU).
Although both sensor systems are based on correlation technique, sharing many common
features, the principles are somewhat different. Accordingly, they are described in different
chapters.
Speed over ground measurement

2.1
The correlation speed log uses acoustic waves in water. The transducer is mounted flush with
the hull, see figure below. Waves are transmitted from the piezo-electric elements into the
water, down to the sea-bed. The sea-bed reflects the signal back to the piezo-electric elements,
which acts as receivers, when not used as transmitters. We use broad antenna lobes because we
are not sensitive to lobe widths, compared to a system using Doppler technique.
Bottom track transmission
Transducer
Hull
Hull
S1
S2
Ahead
Piezo-electric elements
Acoustic beams from transmitting
piezo-electric elements
Projected bottom area
4 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
The beam travels down to the sea bed with a velocity of close to 1500 m/s. This velocity is
almost constant for different frequencies. If we have a calibrated depth meter, we may have to
compensate for salinity, density and temperature differences. The SOG correlation speed logs
operate at 150 kHz, giving a wavelength of 10 mm.
2.2
Depth measurement
The depth measurement is divided into two phases: first we seek the depth by transmitting a
pulse and wait for the echo to return. Once the depth has been measured we use a locked loop
to adjust the depth to correct value.
2.2.1 Seek mode
In the six predefined seek modes the log transmits a pulse. The pulse length varies between 0.3
and 67 ms corresponding to seek ranges from minimum depth 1 to maximum depth 400 meters.
After the transmit pulse the receiver is sampled at regular intervals. The echo will have the
same length as the transmitted pulse. The log correlates the transmitted pulse with the echo to
form an echo function. The peak of this function corresponds to the time it takes for the pulse to
travel from the hull to the sea-bed and back. If a valid echo is found the log enters the depth
lock mode.
Depth seek mode

Transmit pulse
Echo signal
Sampling
2 * Depth / C
2.2.2 Lock mode

In the depth lock mode we use the known depth value to measure the depth more accurately.
The depth lock mode is divided into 9 cycles, see figure below. During cycle 1 a pulse is
transmitted. The length of this pulse is equal to the time it takes for the wave to travel from the
transducer to the sea bottom. During cycle 2 this signal travels back to the transducer. During
cycle 3 the echo pulse is active on the transducer elements. The positive edge of the returned
echo is locked to always come at start of cycle 3, se figure below.
5 (26)
Consilium
Depth lock mode

1 2
3 4
6 7 8
Art No. 702273C5
9 1
Transmit pulse
Echo signal
Sampling
Depth lock
Speed measurement
If the edge comes too late, the pulse duration is lengthened, if it comes too early, the pulse
duration is shortened.
During cycle 5 and 6 a second pulse is transmitted. This pulse is equal to the time the signal
travels from the transducer to the sea-bed and back again. During cycle 7 and 8 the echo is used
for speed measurement.
2.3
Speed measurement
The receiving sensor elements will see a speckle pattern. First we discuss this pattern, and then
correlation technique to estimate the speed.
2.3.1 Speckle pattern
A coherent beam is transmitted towards the sea-bed. This means that the signal has both
intensity and phase information. When the signal is reflected back, the signal will be modulated
both in amplitude and phase. Each reflector will give a phase and amplitude modulation of the
signal. If the bottom has a depth variation larger than the wavelength (10 mm) it will give a
random phase modulation. All reflectors will sum up in one position depending on the distance
to that position, see figure below.
6 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
Bottom track reception
Transducer
Hull
Hull
S1
S2
Ahead
Piezo-electric elements
Acoustic beams from reflecting
objects in bottom back to
piezo-electric elements
Projected bottom area
In some spots the reflectors will cancel each other, while in other spots they will support each
other. The same effect is used in holography, where also both phase and amplitude information
is used. Thus we get a "holographic pattern" on the hull of the ship with loud and silent spots. It
can be shown that the size of a loud spot is typically the same as the transmitter area.
The receivers measure the intensity as they travel over this pattern. One such computer
simulated pattern with only five reflectors can be seen in the figure below.
7 (26)
Consilium
sigbel
8 (26)
Art No. 702273C5
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
This pattern may also be visualised as a map with valleys and mountains representing the
intensity at the position, see figure below.
sigbel
9 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
When the transducer is moved across this pattern the elements measure the intensity along the
intersection of this map. Two sensors aligned with the motion may give the following result,
see figure below.
5
3
s1
s2
n
n
2
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Figure: two identical signals with delay caused by displacement between sensors.
A complex sensor as the SAL TRU-2-2 will measure intensity along several intersections of the
map. The figure below shows the difference at 45 and a 90 relative to the motion. The
similarity decreases, and the signal time displacement decreases.
5
s1
n
3
s2
s3
s4
n
n
2
n
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
The ship moves the transducer during both transmit and receive. This will be seen as a doubled
speed of the speckle pattern during receive. The interference pattern will give signals with
100% modulation that are easy to detect. Side lobes give no false speed. The broad beam gives
10 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
always some signal component back, compared to doppler using a narrow beam which may be
missed if the ship is rolling. The interference pattern is also unaffected by salinity, temperature
and density. A layer may give a signal component from that layer if it has time delay close to
the bottom echo, but as long as the main signal comes from the bottom, this will be the main
speed source.
2.3.2 Correlation technique
Correlation is a method of finding the similarity between signals. The definition we use is to
calculate at what time difference between signal pairs the similarity is maximised. This time
delay corresponds to the distance between the sensors. By dividing this distance by the time we
get the speed.
In the "interpolation mode", when the time delay is larger than the maximum pulse length, we
cannot calculate the speed directly. This limit is when the speed [in knots] multiplied with the
depth [in metres] is less than 41. In this case signal statistics is used to estimate the speed.
Accuracy is lower in this mode.
The two axis log (SAL T2, SAL T3) calculates the velocity in six different directions and then
weights them together to find the longitudinal and transversal component. The patented
transducer configuration with only five elements gives the possibility to measure speed in all
directions with a 30 resolution, see figure below.
SAL 860 transducer configuration
Longitudinal
s1
s3
s5
s2
Transversal
s4
Fig: SAL TRU-2-2, T2, T3 /860 transducer. Used measurement directions: 0 (s1s2), +30 (s2
s4), -30 (s5s4), +60 (s3s2), -60 (s1s3) and 90 (s5 - s2).
11 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
Speed through water measurement

3.1
The transducer will send two parallel signals into the water. The signal to the forward crystal
(TRU cable 1 and 2) will have a frequency of 3.8 MHz and to the astern crystal (TRU cable 4
and 5) 4.2 MHz. Output amplitude is approximately 25 V in 100 ohms, giving an electrical
output of 3 W. The theoretical lobe function is shown in figure below.
.01
.01
10
10
20
20
30
30
20 . log
Sb
m
10
40
20 . log
, 0
Sb ( m , 0 )
)
50
40
60
50
70
60
80
70
10
90
10
100
100
m
10
Figure: Lobe function for STW part of the TRU-2-2. Y-axis: dB, X-axis: degrees
relative to symmetry axis of transducer element.
The lobe function is very narrow, and no side lobe contributes significantly to the signal
content. It is thus fair to assume that the beam goes perpendicular to the surface of the crystal.
Only the main lobe is considered in the following discussion.
The transmit pulses
25 V
25 V
4.2 MHz
3.8 MHz
Hull
Hull
S1
S2
Figure: The transmit pulses
12 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
Correlation technique is used to calculate the time delay between the signals. The operating
frequency, centred on 4 MHz, has been empirically optimised. It is a trade-off between signal
decay, lobe function and transducer design.
The signals from the transducer move out into the water. They are reflected by objects and
move back to the transducer. The effective speed for the pulses is thus half the speed of sound
in water. The time delay for signal echo is thus proportional to this speed multiplied with the
distance to the object. The transmit-pulse length gives a volume, which may give echo at a
given delay. Figure E shows the measurement water volume, which may give an echo for a
transmit-pulse. The STW-log makes an integration of the signal for a given time. This is
equivalent of the water volume moving outwards during this time at half the speed of sound.
Hull
S1
S2
Hull
1/2 echo time
Integration
time
Water flow direction
Figure: Measured water volume

The signals thus received can be regarded as two snapshots of the flow of particles under the
ship. Using correlation technique it is possible to compare how much the signals differs in time.
Knowing the distance between the crystals it is easy to calculate the speed of the particles and
hence the speed of the ship through the water.
3.2
Signal processing
The STW-log is used to measure relative speed in the boundary layer (see section on
calibration) using acoustic correlation technique. The signal is measured in a water volume at a
chosen distance below the hull. The echo signal is intensity modulated by the particles that
traverse the water volume below the sensors.
Correlation technique is used to calculate the time delay (t) between signal S1 and S2. This is
called temporal correlation. If the sensor is based on a one or two-dimensional array the
displacement calculation is called spatial correlation. A number of algorithms have been
developed to measure this delay / displacement. The extreme of the correlation function
maximises the similarity of the signals. This delay is called 0 (tau), see figure E.
13 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
S1
Delay ( ) is two samples

0
S2
samples
Figure: Time displacement between signals.

3.3
Correlation functions
The correlation function is used to measure the displacement between the two channels. One
often-used correlation function is the cross correlation function (CCF). It is defined as:
ccf ( ) =
s1(i) * s2(i + )
i
where N is the number of summation points. The speed () is then calculated as

v=
where (D) is the distance between the sensors, and 0 is the displacement corresponding to
maximum correlation. The algorithm used in the STW-log is slightly different, and gives a
minimum for the maximum correlation coefficient, see figure below.
14 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
Correlation function
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-4 -3 -2 -1
0 1 2
3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10
Delay
Figure: Discrete correlation function.

Y-axis: correlation function, X-axis: time delays.
In the figure above the minimum correlation value (maximum correlation) corresponds to a
time delay of two sample intervals.
3.3.1 Boundary layer and calibration
The water close to the hull moves slower than further away. This layer with lower speed is
called the boundary layer, see figure below.
Ships hull
Ships
Speed
Next to hull: Relative

water speed = 0
Inside
Boundary
Layer
At 1/2 boundary layer:

Relative water speed = 90%U
At boundary layer edge:

Relative water Speed
0
Outside boundary layer
(Relative water speed = U)
Figure: Boundary layer.

The STW-log measures speed close to the hull, and may thus measure a lower speed. When the
ship is shallow water, the boundary layer may be different from normal. This physical effect
will affect all logs measuring relative speed.
15 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
The positioning of the TRU is very important. The water flow below the TRU must not be
turbulent or affected by skew water flows. Turbulent flow gives no common signal between the
two channels.
Calibration is needed to compensate STW speed change. The calibration may be set in one
point, called single point calibration, or more than one point, called multiple point calibration.
3.4
Sampling control
Sampling is controlled by three timing factors: Transmit pulse length, Echo time and
Integration time:
SAL R1 sampling
Transmit pulse
Echo time
Integration time
Figure: Sampling
One sample-period starts when the transmit-pulse is emitted for the time T (i.e. Transmit pulse
length). As already described the signal is sent out into the water and reflected against particles.
Both crystals in the TRU transmit and receive simultaneously. The transmit pulse, echo and
integration times are possible to adjust in the STW-log. The sum of transmit pulse, echo and
integration time is software limited to 199.3 s.
Adjusting the STW-log sampling timing is intended only after discussions with Consilium
Navigation. It is included to give the possibility to fine tune installations, but may give the log
bad working conditions if used without experience. The calibration must be remade after
changing sampling timing, as the calibration factor differs at different positions within the
boundary layer.
Reasons for changing the parameters may include:
High-speed vessels may find better working conditions closer to the hull as the boundary
layer is thinner.
Slow-speed vessels (as submarines) may find better working conditions further away from
the hull as the boundary layer is thicker.
In very clear water with low particle content a longer integration time gives a better signal
to noise ratio. On the other hand, in waters with high-particle content a shorter integration
time is preferred.
3.4.1 Transmit pulse
The length of the transmit pulse has empirically been set to 10.7 s. Normally this value should
not be altered, unless the measurement conditions are too unfavourable for this setting.
16 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
3.4.2 Echo time

The echo time is the time the log waits until it starts to integrate the reflected signal. Its value
decides how far from the hull the log will measure. The minimum measurement distance (dist)
from the hull in millimetres can be calculated by entering the echo time in microseconds in the
formula:
dist =
15
. * echotime
2
The echo time has empirically been set to 150.7 s.
3.4.3 Integration time

The integration time sets the time the log integrates (or listens to) the echo. The echo time has
empirically been set to 35.7 s. The thickness of the measurement volume may be estimated by
the same formula as above.
3.4.4 How to interpret the signals received

It is possible to diagnose the working conditions for the STW-log using an oscilloscope. The
figures below show the expected signals for the WTU.
Signal
Time
Figure: Signal response under bad conditions

This is an example of how the signal looks when running the STW-log in water with extremely
high particle content. No peaks from individual particles can be found. They are all hidden in a
continuum decay of the transmitted signal. The log is unable to measure the speed.
On the WTU board there is a separate mode to improve reading during dirty water conditions.
When the software senses bad conditions the hardware is forced into Dirty water mode.
In this mode all signals are heavily damped which gives a response more like the figure Signal
response in very clear water below.
17 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
Signal
Time
Figure: Signal response under normal conditions

This is an example of how the signal looks when running the STW-log in water with a high
density of particles. Peaks from individual particles are added on top of the declining signal.
The log is able to measure the speed.
Signal
Time
Figure: Signal response in very clear water

This is an example of how the signal looks when running the STW-log in very clear water with
almost no particles. Peaks from the very few particles present are clearly visible. The log
measures the speed, but if no particles pass by the TRU for a long period of time, it may loose
track of the speed.
3.4.5 Digital filtering

When there is a high density of particles in the water this can be seen as an increase in AGC
levels. To improve the quality of the integrated signal before correlation a digital filtering is
performed on the data. This, however, increases the risk of presenting false speeds. For this
reason digital filtering is used only when the AGC levels indicate there is a high concentration
of particles in the water.
18 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
Signal
Speed information
IIR
True signal
Frequence
Figure: Digital filtering
Digital filtering is used when the present AGC level is higher than background noise level plus
a certain offset. The offset can be adjusted in a menu.
3.5
Speed filtering
The inaccuracy of the speed value depends on the time constant. The correlation speed log
inaccuracy depends on the correlation coefficient and the measurement distance. A longer
measurement distance will give a more accurate value. The selected time constant is a
compromise between fast response and stable readings.
In lower speeds, the relative time-delay change is large when the speed changes. The relative
time delay change from 1 to 5 knots is thus equal to the change from 10 to 50 knots. In order to
keep the log from loosing track of the speed in the low speed range, the algorithm uses a
number of fix delays. The speed estimate is then interpolated.
3.6
Distance calculation
The speed value is integrated into distance. The distance information is sent to indicators as
serial NMEA message for synchronisation of the total speed through water distance data, DIST
WAT.
3.7
Adverse conditions
It is important to remember that what the STW-log measures is actually the speed of a discrete
number of reflectors moving in a small water volume under the hull. In order to interpret the
echoed signal it is anticipated that the particles are moving parallel to the vessel axis. If the
19 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
transducer has been installed at a non-preference location of the hull the water flow might be
turbulent at the site of the transducer. Under these conditions there is no guarantee for the log to
work. See section on installation of bottom parts for correct transducer installation.
In the low speed range, the distance travelled per time interval is low yielding limited
information to the correlation function. This influences accuracy and may impose lost speed
track conditions.
The log may encounter problems to measure when the ship moves in water with high particle
content. This depends on that many particles give "foggy" reflections, which makes it difficult
to see the same pattern at the true delay.
3.8
WTU user interface
The menu system in the WTU is accessed using the Speed Log Master Display.
Four green LEDs are also available on the WTU board. Tr1 and Tr2 are lit
when the transmitter of the WTU is active and working properly. Clearwater is
lit when in normal mode and darkened when in dirty water mode. Corr is lit
when the correlation coefficient is good or better.
3.9
Software
The STW-log software has different working modes. This chapter describes the STW-log
functions seen by the user.
3.9.1 Power on / software update
At power on the WTU runs a special program that tests if the WTU code is present. If the code
is found and correct, the WTU starts to execute in normal operation. Software program updates
are also possible to download into the WTU with this program. This program controls erase and
store of the update.
3.9.2 Normal operation
The STW-log has three processes that run in parallel: measurement, menu system and
evaluation of measurement data. It is thus possible to enter the menu system without stopping
the log from measuring. The only exception to this is test modes, where the log transmits a
simulated dummy speed. The test mode T3 may also be used by the program itself for testing
the transducer levels.
The measurement process can be divided into seek and lock modes. After power on the log
enters seek mode. It seeks for zero speed (mode SZ) and based on the result of the measurement
it may stay in zero speed mode, or enter speed seek modes. The speed seek modes are seek Low
speed (mode SL) for speeds below 4 knots, or seek High speed (mode SH) for speeds above 2
knots. The seek operation is repeated until a valid speed is found. The log then enters the
locked speed modes. There are two locked modes, one in the high speed range above 2 knots
(mode LH), and one for speeds below 2.5 knots (mode LL).
20 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
There is an AGC (Automatic Gain Control) for each channel on the input of the STW-log. It
will check the strength of the signals on channel 1 and 2 respectively and compensate the input
so that the signals are at an optimum when the log starts to sample and correlate them. A low
AGC value (in mV) is equivalent to a high amplification of the signal, and vice versa. The
maximum AGC value is 2200 mV. A normal value is 1200 to 1400 mV, whilst in very clear
waters the value may approach the background noise level. To summarise; high value indicates
many particles and low value indicate few reflectors in the water. In water with high particle
content a digital filter is applied (field F) to improve signal conditions.
The Speed Log Master Display when remote connected to the WTU can show the working
condition, speed information and signal level. The readout uses the following field descriptors:
MM XX.XX YY.YY
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
If no valid speed is found the log enters search modes where XX.XX and S=DDDD share the
same position. The definition for the field descriptors is found in the table below.
Descriptor
Explanation
Working mode (SZ, SL, SH, LL, LZ)
MM
Sensed (raw) speed from transducer
XX.XX
YY.YY / --.--
Output speed including calibration and time constant

averaging. Field is --.-- if no valid speed is available.
Digital Filter setting. 'F' equals digital filter preprocessing of sample data, 'R' equals raw sampling, 'L'
equals limiter + digital filter.
Normalised correlation coefficient between 0.999,
higher coefficient is better
Normalised signal quality value between 0.999, higher
value is better
first/second channel AGC level [mV]
F
C=DDD
S=DDD
ZZZZ:TTTT
3.9.2.1 Seek zero speed mode

In "Seek-zero-Speed-mode" the log has a predefined sampling interval and calculates a special
correlation function to estimate the speed range and detect zero speed condition. The readouts
presents information if it detects zero speed as:
SZ
0.00 YY.YY
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
3.9.2.2 Seek low speed mode
In "Seek-low-speed-mode" the log seeks for speed in the lower speed range. It has a predefined
sampling interval and calculates the correlation function corresponding to a number of discrete
speeds. If speed is found in the high end of the seek range, seek high mode is called. The values
for correlation coefficient (C) and signal quality (S) is presented:
SL S=DDD
YY.YY
21 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
3.9.2.3 Locked low speed mode
In "Locked-Low-Speed-mode" the log has a predefined sampling interval and calculates the
correlation function corresponding to a number of discrete speeds. Interpolation is used to give
better speed resolution. If the speed is below 0.2 knots, seek zero speed mode is entered. If the
speed is above 2.5 knots, lock high speed mode is entered. The readouts presents speed
information in the following format:
LL XX.XX YY.YY
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
3.9.2.4 Seek high mode
In "Seek-high-mode" the log searches for speed in the upper speed range. It has a predefined
speeds. The values for correlation coefficient (C) and signal quality (S) is presented:
SH S=DDD YY.YY
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
3.9.2.5 Locked high speed mode

In "locked-high-speed-mode" the log has locked in on the speed and uses a feedback algorithm
to adjust sampling to track the speed. If the speed is below 2 knots, lock low speed mode is
entered. The readouts presents the speed in the following format:
LH XX.XX YY.YY
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
3.9.2.6 Test modes
In the test modes the log stops to measure speed. The test modes stay active until power off or
the user releases the test mode. The software to register the AGC background level also uses
the test mode T3. The transmission is then switched off and the log measures the settling of the
levels.
T3 TRU SIGNAL
LEVELS ZZZZ:TTTT
Settling is stopped after 10 seconds, and the log returns to normal operation. The readouts
presents normal test result as:
T3 TRU SIGNAL
LEVELS NORMAL
If signal levels are (too) low (and the transducer may be damaged or not connected) as:
T3 TRU SIGNAL
LEVELS LOW
22 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
3.9.3 Menu system

To reach the menu system on the WTU, use the Speed Log Master Display. If no keys are
pressed for 180 seconds, the menu times out to normal operation, except when in test menus.
The menu system is described in a separate document.
23 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
Transducer TRU-2-2
The transducer is a highly refined product, containing piezoelectric sensor elements facing the
water and containing some matching circuits to achieve good matching to the cable (30 m of
cable is supplied as standard, option 40m).
207,51 mm
122,00 mm
Transducer direction in centerline

of ship, facing forward
( Front view of transducer head )
As seen, the transducer elements are clearly divided into the five SOG elements and the two
STW elements in a separate casing.
Electrically, each sensor element is connected via a matching transformer to a separately
shielded twisted pair. For transmission with the low frequency SOG part, a separate transmit
cable pair is used, that connects the signal to the three transducer elements used for
transmission.
The positioning of the transducer is very important. The water flow below the transducer must
not be turbulent or affected by skew water flows. Turbulent flow gives no common signal
between the two STW channels.
24 (26)
Consilium
Art No. 702273C5
ELC - Electronics Unit
The Electronics Unit is from the functional point of view divided into two more or less
separated units: SOG unit (BTU; T2F, T2R and transmitter integrated on T-M board) and STW
unit (WTU). Block diagram is shown below:
T2F
Additional T2R
used in T3+ only
T2R
WTU
TP: +12V
TP: VCC
TP: -12V
TP: +5V
TP: -5V
TP: AGND
+5V
-5V
S0 Tmit -10dB
S1 Tmit -20dB
S2 MUX Enable
S3 Transmit
S4 AMP1 +20dB
S5 AMP2 +40dB
S6 LoopBackEn.
S7 Osc. synchr.
TR2
TR1
CLEAR WATER
CORR OK
S8 Overflow
J3
Test
connector
9P-DSUB
Service
connector
9P-DSUB
Service
connector
P3
Test
connector
FLAGS0
FLAG0
LED D
LED C
LED B
LED A
NMEA 4, Tx
NMEA 5, Rx
NMEA 2, Tx
NMEA 3 (6)
NMEA 0, Tx
NMEA 1, Rx
TMIT DIS.
Fuse:
F301: 2.5 A(SB), Backup power supply
F302: 2.5 A(SB), Backup power sypply
F303: 2.5 A(SB), Main power supply
F305: 2.5 A(SB), Spare fuse
115VAC
MAIN
230VAC
MAIN
+12V
J8
9P-DSUB
Service
connector
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
NMEA 0 (Tx BT)

NMEA 1 (Rx Main)
NMEA 2 (Tx Main)
NMEA 4 (TxSG1)
NMEA 5 (RxSG1)
Transducer WT
NMEA IN / OUT
Transmit Control
Transducer BT
25 (26)
Additional NMEA out
NMEA in from LPU

NMEA out to LPU
OVDC
0VDC
OVDC
ALARM
shown
de-energised
230VAC Power supply, Main 2
(Option 115VAC)
230VAC Power supply, Main 1

(Option 115VAC)
DANGER
High voltage
Transducer BT
Earth screw
(Transducer)
Transducer cable
230VAC
BACKUP
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY
TO BE USED WHEN TWO
TRANSFORMERS ARE MOUNTED
NMEA 6 (TxWT)
115VAC
BACKUP
Consilium
5.1
Art No. 702273C5
BTU-PCB
The BTU-PCB unit consists of two boards T2F and T2R (one additional T2R in T3+), placed in
a rack on the T2-M motherboard which also includes a power supply and an amplifier section
for the transmit pulse.
T2F has the function to condition and amplify the signals received from the five piezo-electric
elements in the transducer, T2R is the main processor board in the BT unit. The amplifier
integrated on the T-M motherboard is used to amplify the transmit pulse which is generated by
T2R.
5.2
WTU-PCB
The WTU-PCB consists of one board placed on T-M motherboard in the same rack as the
BTU-PCBs. The WTU PCB is powered from a separate power supply also included on the T2M motherboard.
5.3
Data transmission / reception
Data is sent and received from the log as serial NMEA messages on standard IEC 61162-1 /
NMEA (RS 422/485) output / input.
Serial NMEA messages used by the speed log are described in detail in Technical Document
700164, which is available from Consilium Navigation AB.
The following NMEA sentences are transmitted in a standard setup:
Serial port
NMEA0(TxBT)
Terminal 102/103
NMEA1(RxMain)
Terminal 105/106
NMEA2(TxMain)
Terminal 108/109
NMEA4(Tx)
Terminal 114/115
NMEA5(Rx)
Terminal 117/118
NMEA6(TxWT)
Terminal 120/121
Function
This output carries basic information. Can
be used by external users.
Main input.
NMEA sentences transmitted

VDVBW, VDDPT
Main output, also containing additional

information used internally in the
Consilium speed log system.
Not Used.
VDVBW, VDDPT,
VDVLW, PSALS, PSALX
Not Used.
Messages are generated in the WTU. Used VDVBW, VDDPT,

as a redundancy output that will continue
VDVLW, PSALS
to operate also if the BT unit is
malfunctioning.
Note that also other NMEA sentences than those mentioned above might be transmitted on any
channel depending on setup and working mode.
NMEA-messages are also available through RS232 on two 9-pole D-sub-connector, one on
T2R and one on WTU. It is used for data logging and software updates. Thus it is possible to
read out information directly on an ordinary PC using for instance a terminal emulator program.
26 (26)
Consilium
SAL T-series
Consilium
Technical
Specification
Article No. 702274
Consilium
SAL T-Series Technical Specification
Art No. 702274C2
Abstract: Performance, environmental conditions and power requirements for the SAL TSeries log system
Contents:
1
GENERAL
PERFORMANCE
2.1 Principle of operation

2.1.1
STW (speed through water = relative speed)
2.1.2
SOG (speed over ground = true speed)
4
4
4
2.2 Inaccuracy
2.2.1
STW
2.2.2
SOG
2.2.3
Distance Trough Water Inaccuracy
2.2.4
Distance Over Ground Inaccuracy
2.2.5
Echo sounder depths (SAL T1 and SAL T3)
4
4
4
5
5
5
2.3 Function limits

2.3.1
Speed tracking acceleration, SOG
2.3.2
Influence of abnormal conditions, SOG
2.3.3
Influence of abnormal conditions, STW
5
5
5
5
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
OUTPUT SIGNALS
4.1 Serial outputs

4.1.1
ELC - Electronics Unit
4.1.2
LPU2 Log Processing Unit
6
6
6
4.2 Relays, opto-couplers and analogue outputs

4.2.1
LPU2, Log Processing Unit
6
6
CALIBRATION
POWER REQUIREMENTS
LIABILITY
2 (8)
Consilium
Art No. 702274C2
Revisions:
Date
2002-04-04
2004-03-12
2004-09-24
2005-08-04
2007-12-19
2009-03-10
2010-04-29
Version
A1
A2
A3
A4
C0
C1
C2
Author
SFS
HW
RB/HW
OM
OM/RB
OM
OM
Comment
Created from 703252 and 702274A0
Tex changed from T2 to T-Series. Echo sounder added
Editorial changes, WTU PCB,
Added SD4 and Echo sounder alarm
Changed LPU to LPU2, deleted SD1 and SD2, NMEA rev
Correspond to IEC62288, SOG, STW
Corrections
3 (8)
Consilium
Art No. 702274C2
General
The technical specification in this section deals with the SAL T-Series system, including the
Transducer, Electronics unit, Optional LPU and connected Display units. Operating
performance limits like inaccuracies or certain measurement criteria are set by the speed
sensors, i. e. the combination Transducer/Electronics unit.
Performance
The performance limits defined here are met when the log system is operating within the
environmental conditions described in this section and if calibration is correctly done.
2.1
Principle of operation
Acoustic correlation using vertical beams. The log system uses two different sensors,
measuring speed trough water (STW) and speed over ground (SOG) simultaneously and
independently.
2.1.1 STW (speed through water = relative speed)
Frequencies:
3.8 and 4.2 MHz
Speed is measured at a distance of 130 mm from the surface of the transducer.
Depth range:
> 3 m.
Speed range:
50 knots sensed speed trough the water.
2.1.2 SOG (speed over ground = true speed)

Frequency:
150 kHz
Depth range:
Nominally 2 - 250 m below transducer.
Speed range:
40 knots in any direction.
2.2
Inaccuracy
The SOG measurement system operates in two different modes, resulting in different
precision of the measurement. The "Normal mode" gives better accuracy but is only active
when the speed and depth product (meters and knots, respectively) is above 41. When this
condition is not met, the "Interpolation mode" is active, producing a somewhat degraded
performance.
2.2.1 STW
Speed accuracy relative to sensed water flow: 0.1 knot or 0.5%, whichever is greater.
2.2.2 SOG
Normal mode:
0.1 knot or 0.5%, whichever is greater.
Interpolation mode: 0.2 knots.
4 (8)
Consilium
Art No. 702274C2
2.2.3 Distance Trough Water Inaccuracy

Less than 0.5% of travelled distance through the water.
2.2.4 Distance Over Ground Inaccuracy
The distance error will accumulate geometrically because of the error distribution function.
Therefore, the inaccuracy limit, expressed as a percentage of the travelled distance, will
decrease with increased accumulated distance. The values given are for reasonably realistic
sailing conditions and are expressed at a confidence level of 85%.
Travelled distance
2 to 10 NM
10 to 50 NM
Over 50 NM
Inaccuracy
0.2%
0.1%
0.05%
2.2.5 Echo sounder depths (SAL T1 and SAL T3)

Depth range 2-250 metres
Accuracy 0.5 metres on the Shallow range scale, respectively 5 meters on the Deep range
scale; or 2.5% of the Indicated depth, whichever is greatest
2.3
Function limits
2.3.1 Speed tracking acceleration, SOG

Normal:
Longitudinal speed 0.9 knots/second
Transversal speed 0.1 knots/second (SAL T2 and SAL T3)
Interpolation:
Longitudinal speed 0.3 knots/second

Transversal speed 0.1 knots/second (SAL T2 and SAL T3)
2.3.2 Influence of abnormal conditions, SOG

Pitching at 5 degrees at 0.25 Hz, rolling at 30 degrees at 0.25 Hz and yawing 5 degrees at
0.125 Hz will produce dynamic speed errors typically less than 0.2%.
2.3.3 Influence of abnormal conditions, STW
The STW-log may, under unfavourable acoustic conditions, fail to indicate speed. Under such
conditions it may indicate "0.0" on analogue devices or 0.0 or --- on digital indicators.
Note! The STW part of the SAL T-series system is sensitive to the quality of the water flow.
This has to be parallel and non-turbulent, especially in situations with a large number of
acoustic reflectors in the water, such as muddy water in rivers, river inlets etc. Under such
conditions the STW speed indication may fail as described above. The SOG speed sensor is
not affected by this.
5 (8)
Consilium
Art No. 702274C2
Environmental conditions
All units of the system meet the environmental conditions specified in IEC 60945.
Unit
Transducer/Bottom parts
Electronics Unit
Log Processing Unit
Echo Souder display
SD4 indicators
SD4 indicators w SD4 SA or bulkhead mount box
Protected
Exposed
X
X
X
X
Submerged
X
X1
X
1)
Front panel for SD indicator gives watertight mounting to panel.
Output signals
4.1
Serial outputs
All serial outputs are based on IEC 61162-1 :2007(E) (NMEA 0183 standard rev 3.01).
Output drivers are utilised using RS 485 or RS422 components. For a closer definition of
NMEA messages used in SAL logs, please refer to Technical Document 700164, which is
available from Consilium Navigation AB.
4.1.1 ELC - Electronics Unit
One NMEA output channel, carrying $VDVBW, $VDVLW and $VDDPT messages, also
carrying internal priority PSAL messages.
One additional NMEA output channel from the STW-part is used to achieve full redundancy
between the STW- and SOG part of the log. This redundancy output channel is mandatory in
SAL T1 / T3 / T3+ combined speed log & echo sounder systems and when connecting the
ELC to a LPU2.
One NMEA input channel, used for remote control such as calibration and service.
4.1.2 LPU2 Log Processing Unit
23 serial outputs fed from 13 separately buffered NMEA drivers. The LPU2 has various
options to perform message conversion and calculations and has also variety of inputs for
taking data from other units. Please consult LPU2 section for this.
4.2
Relays, opto-couplers and analogue outputs
4.2.1 LPU2, Log Processing Unit

Switchover relays:
Closing-contacts relays:
Opto-coupler outputs:
4
4
8
The LPU2 has two analogue outputs that can be individually programmed to carry speed and
depth information.
Please consult LPU2 section for more information about this.
6 (8)
Consilium
Art No. 702274C2
Calibration
The SAL T-series log has built-in functions to calibrate speed measurement correction factors
and transducer alignment via the Speed Log Master Display, both for the SOG and STW unit.
STW: Calibration range -50.00% to +50.00% of measured value in 0.01% steps.
SOG: Calibration range -50.00% to +50.00% of measured speed in 0.01% steps.
SOG angle: Calibration range -180.0 to +180.0 in 0.1 steps.
The STW-log needs correction calibration in all ships due to water flow around hull, while
SOG-log angle calibration is only needed when correct transducer alignment is impossible to
reach. The SOG-log seldom needs calibration and requires extremely accurate reference data.
7 (8)
Consilium
Art No. 702274C2
Power requirements
ELC
Voltage:
Frequency:
Power consumption:
LPU2
Voltage:
Frequency:
Power consumption
ESD2
Voltage:
Power consumption
Powered from the LPU2.
198 253 V AC (optionally 99 - 126 V AC)

47.5 - 63 Hz
less than 300 VA
198 - 253 V AC (optionally 99 - 126 V AC)

47.5 - 63 Hz
less than 150 VA, including connected 35 W
ESD2 and 9 SD4 indicators.
18 - 36 V DC
typical 25W peak 35W.
SD4
Voltage
10 - 32 V DC
Current:
150 mA maximum, 100 mA typically.
Powered from the LPU2 normally. An optional AC power supply unit SDP for 115/230 V AC
operation is available, see sections SD4.
Liability
All equipment described in this manual was designed for use on board ships to fulfil
requirements specified in various IMO documents.
However, equipment may sometimes fail or work outside its performance specification due to
component malfunction or depending on other factors.
Consilium Marine & Safety AB will not take any responsibility if this equipment is used in
such a way that its normal or abnormal function causes damage or creates situations that can
be dangerous.
8 (8)
Consilium
Consilium
SAL T-series
Installation of
transducer and
bottom parts
Article No. 701618
Consilium
Installation of transducer and bottom parts Art No. 701618Ad
Contents
1.
General
2.
Transducer siting requirements
3.
Installation of Bottom Parts
4.
Mounting Set Single Bottom Sea Valve (MSSBSV)
5.
Mounting Set Double Bottom Sea Valve (MSDBSV)
6.
Mounting Set Single Bottom (MSSB)
7.
Transducer installation
Revisions
Date
92-02-09
97-12-18
99-05-20
02-04-23
2002-07-11
2002-10-16
2002-11-20
2005-05-11
2007-11-20
2008-10-21
2009-02-10
2009-03-10
2009-06-07
2010-05-24
Ver.
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
Ab
AC
Ad
Name
PGM
Aj
Aj/STE
JXA
STE
STE
HW
HW
HW
RB
RB/OM
OM
HW
OM
Comment
Created
Dimension drawing of valve, updated figures
Typographical changes, TRU location
New first page and headers/footers
Transducer cable clarifications
Added T2 descriptions
Transducer location clarifications
Installation heights clarified
Transducer location requirements
Added MSSB and productnumber in fig 2.5+2.7
Added unpacking of Bottom Flange + editorial
Correspond to IEC 62288, SOG, STW
Change P/N for SAL TRU T-2-2
Company name changed
2 (34)
Consilium
General
This part is intended to explain the various factors to be considered when selecting a position
for the transducer. The siting of the SAL TRU-2-2 transducer is an important factor in
determining the accuracy and efficiency of the overall system.
The transducer is designed to be fitted flush with the hull, along the longitudinal axis of the
hull. It measures the SOG (true speed) of the ship relative to the sea bed and the STW
(relative speed) will be measured in the water mass approximately 130 mm below the ships
hull. This makes it suitable to be installed on ships of all sizes.
NOTE: The transducer is tested with the cable as one unit. Do not cut or modify the
transducer cable. The relative speed measurement operates at a frequency where cable length
may affect performance. Consilium Marine & Safety AB takes no responsibility in case of
cable modification.
Transducer SAL TRU-2-2

The transducer comprises one pair of piezo-electric elements for relative speed measurement
and one set (5 pcs) of piezo-elements grouped in a patented array for true speed measurement.
The transducer is used for transmission and reception of the acoustic signals.
The transducer is delivered with a 30-meter standard cable, which is permanently connected to
the transducer head with watertight mould. The dimensions of the transducer are given in
Figs. 2.10.
Transducer "Bottom view"
Transducer "Profile"
30 m (standard)
Water tracking
transducer elements
3
1
210
Transducer direction
145
180
5
Bottom tracking elements
122
Bottom Parts
The bottom parts of the system are shown in Figs. 2.5 and 2.8. A steel bottom flange is
welded to the ships hull surface. The bottom flange including the guide ring, holds the
transducer flush with the underside of the hull. The valve cover of the sea valve makes it
possible to change the transducer without dry-docking the vessel.
When using the MSSB arrangement without sea valve, maintenance of the transduser has to
be done dry-docking the vessel.
3 (34)
Consilium
The connecting tube holds the transducer fixed in its position with a tube bracket assembly
and has a watertight cable seal in its top end.
Bottom Sea Valve (MSSBSV)
Flat faces towards starboard
2.
Transducer location requirements
1. To achieve the best performance of the log, special care must be taken to find the best area
in respect of water streaming under the transducer head. The transducer location MUST
BE APPROVED BY CONSILIUM MARINE & SAFETY AB in terms of the hydro
dynamical conditions, otherwise the guarantee for the log system will not be valid. Early
discussions on transducer location with drawings are always recommended. The hydro
dynamical approval given by Consilium concerns only the above requirement and not the
inside design, such as installation height, access to closing valve or any inside obstacles
that might occur and jeopardise the function or maintenance. For more detailed
installation advises please read the full manual.
2. The transducer should be installed in the foremost part of the vessel as close as possible to
the keel line.
3. The bottom valve should always be installed perpendicular to the ships horizontal plane.
4. The sea valve arrangement and transducer cable are not intended for submerged mounting
in a water filled tank. If no other alternative is available a separate watertight (W.T.)
compartment must be arranged housing the sea valve/transducer assembly. The cable must
be run in a watertight pipe conduit, connecting directly from the W.T. compartment to
free/dry space where the log electronics unit (ELC) is normally installed.
5. The compartment in which the transducer is installed may be sealed by a manhole or hatch
but the compartment must always be accessible for service.
6. The transducer cable must not be permanently installed in case of service or replacement
of defective transducer. Extra cable shall be coiled.
Do not cut the cable! Warranty is void if cable is cut.
4 (34)
Consilium
7. Sufficient headroom must be available at the transducer position to allow for its fitting and
removal (see drawings for appropriate bottom parts).
8. On tankers the transducer location is not to be within the EXarea. The transducer must
never come in contact with cargo.
9. The transducer cable shall run directly to the T-series ELC and must never be cut off,
shortened, extended or by any other mean passes a junction!
10. The SAL T speed log operates with ultra-sonic frequencies of 145 - 155 kHz, and 3.8
MHz / 4.2 MHz. The transducer location must be at least 2 m from any echo sounder
transmitters or other similar devices generating the same type of frequencies.
11. In the vicinity of the transducer location, the outside of the vessel must be free from
sudden projections, welding joints, steps and sharp edges. Special care must be taken that
no obstacle occurs before the transducers. These conditions will cause water turbulence,
which may give unreliable speed-readings from the log system.
12. Water inlets and outlets may disturb the water flow. Therefore, the transducer should be at
least 2 m forward of such openings.
13. The transducer (sensor-elements) must always remain submerged, even with a minimum
of cargo in heavy seas.
Boundary Layer
A moving ships hull tends to drag a layer of water with it, causing a boundary region around
the hull. The water speed at the hull is almost the same as the ships speed, so that the relative
water speed is almost zero. With successive water layers, the relative water speed increases
until, at the boundary edge, the relative water speed becomes equal to the ships speed. The
thickness of this boundary layer is not uniform around the ship, and can range from a few
millimetres near the bow to over a meter at the stern on a large ship.
The relative speed of successive water layers is not proportional to distance from the hull, but
follows a curve as shown below:
Ships hull
Ships
Speed

water speed = 0
Inside
Boundary
Layer


0
5 (34)
Consilium
Noise, Cavitations and Other Factors Affecting Acoustic Logs

The transducer operates on the acoustic principle and is therefore susceptible to interference
from acoustic (noise) sources. In particular, the transducer should be fitted well away from the
propeller and other sources of noise, to minimise the effects of noise, vibration and
cavitations.
The transducer and electronics unit is designed to respond principally to the acoustic
reflections denoting the speed of the ship. In some situations, however, the system may
respond to false signals that can arise under adverse conditions. All acoustic logs are affected
in a similar way.
3.
Installation of Bottom Parts
Detailed instructions for installing the different bottom parts are given in the sections that
follow. Refer to the section covering your particular application.
The bottom flange, which is to be welded into the ships hull, is the same size whether it is for
the single or double bottom parts. The bottom flange dimensions are shown in Fig. 2.4 and
2.7.
Unpacking of Bottom Flange

The bottom flange which shall be welded into the ship`s hull is made of construction steel.
Humidity makes the surfaces of the flange corrode if not protected. The flange is therefore
protected from corrosion during transport and storage by a special corrosion inhibitor bag.
This bag should remain sealed during storage for the corrosion protection to have full effect.
The bag shall be opened just before the flange is to be welded into the ship`s hull.
Some flanges might be protected with a Dinitrol rust oil instead of being packed in a corrosion
inhibitor bag. Those flanges are identified by a yellowish brown greasy film covering the
flange which needs to be cleaned away before the flange can be welded into the ship`s hull.
The instruction PP08049, Instructions to handle bottom part protected with rust oil.doc
included in the delivery of the flange describes the cleaning procedure.
Slight normal corrosion on the flange surface will not affect the function.
Maintenance of Bottom Parts

Each bottom part assembly incorporates a zinc ring that acts as a sacrificial anode to prevent
corrosion of the transducer and bottom parts. The zinc ring should be checked, and changed if
deteriorated, each time that the ship is dry-docked.
When maintaining the bottom parts its also recommended to check and tighten the tube
bracket clamp, double fork assy and wing nuts.
The guide ring, zink ring or the TRU shall never be painted!
6 (34)
Consilium
4.
Mounting Set Single Bottom Sea Valve (MSSBSV)
The mounting set single bottom sea valve assembly is suitable for single bottom ships, where
the transducer can be removed without taking the ship out of the water.
Before starting assembly check the contents of the kit against the packing list. Fig. 2.5 shows
how components fit together. The component assembly with its overall dimensions is shown
in Fig. 2.4.
Sea Valve/Transducer Assembly

The bottom flange must first be welded into a hole cut in the ships bottom hull.
1.
Cut a circular hole (diameter 250mm +10/ 0 mm) at the selected transducer position.
Cut out in Ship's hull
2.
Weld the bottom flange into the hole; ensure that it is positioned so that the sea valve
may be fitted without obstruction.
Notes:
1.
Welding work should be carried out by qualified personnel as required by the
applicable classification society.
2.
IT IS IMPORTANT that the outer (bottom) surface of the flange is flush with
the hull and exactly vertical. The welded joint must be ground smooth and
flush with the hull. There must be no sharp edges to interfere with the water
flow around the transducer.
7 (34)
Consilium
Positioning the Bottom flange
Ships Hull
30
2.5
249
Welding the Bottom flange in Ships hull
Ships Hull
Welded joint grinding
Ships Hull
Note! Surface Grinding
8 (34)
Consilium
3.
Fit the zinc ring and the guide ring into the base of the bottom flange and secure with
six FS10 x 30 screws.
Bottom flange
Ships Hull
Zinc ring
Guide ring
Screw M10
4.
Screw eight PS16 x 60 studs into the top of the bottom flange.
Stud
Ships Hull
9 (34)
Consilium
5.
Place seal 1 on the flange surface. Fit the sea valve over the eight PS16 x 60 studs,
align it with the flange and secure it with the eight M6 M16 nuts and eight M6 M16
locknuts.
Seal 1
Seal 1
Ships Hull
Mounting Sea Valve on Bottom flange
Sea valve
Nuts
Ships Hull
10 (34)
Consilium
6.
Apply seal 2 and place it on top of the sea valve, and install the transducer assembly
(see text under chapter, transducer installation). After the transducer assembly are
install in the valve cover, fit it align with the sea valve and secure the valve cover in
the sea valve by using the eight M6S 16x60 screws and eight M6 M16 nuts and eight
M6 M16 locknuts.
Seal 2
Seal 2
Ships Hull
11 (34)
Consilium
Mounting the Transducer assembly and valve cover on Sea Valve
Transducer assembly
Valve cover
Screw
Nut
Ships Hull
12 (34)
Consilium
5.
MOUNTING SET DOUBLE BOTTOM WITH SEA

VALVE (MSDBSV)
Before starting the assembling, check the contents of the kit against the packing list. To
complete the assembly, the Intermediate Tube and Blanking Plate MUST BE
MANUFACTURED BY THE SHIPYARD and welded to the valve flange and the bottom
flange.
Figure 2.8 shows the component assembly with its principal dimensions, and Fig. 2.7 shows
how the components fitted together.
Table 2.1 Intermediate Tube and Transducer Connecting Tube

Lengths
Tank Height T
(See fig. 1.2)
(mm)
Below 700
701-900
901-1100
1101-1300
1301-1500
1501-1700
1701-1900
1901-2100
2101-2300
2301-2500
2501-2700
2701-2900
2901-3100
3101-3300
3301-3500
3501-3700
3701-3900
Intermediate
Tube Length
(mm)
Transducer Connecting Tube

Length (mm)
Part No.
1300
1500
1700
1900
2100
2300
2500
2700
2900
3100
3300
3500
3700
3900
4100
4300
4500
71-19839-08
71-19839-10
71-19839-12
71-19839-14
71-19839-16
71-19839-18
71-19839-20
71-19839-22
71-19839-24
71-19839-26
71-19839-28
71-19839-30
71-19839-32
71-19839-34
71-19839-36
71-19839-38
71-19839-40
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
2200
2400
2600
2800
3000
3200
3400
3600
3800
4000
13 (34)
Consilium
Intermediate Tube and Blanking Plate Manufacture

1.
Make the intermediate tube according to the dimensions shown in Fig. 2.1. The
material used should be steel, type ISO S355JR or equivalent.
Fig. 2.1
160
0
149.8-0.3
10
10
132
45
20
2 0
132
10
10
45
0
149.8-0.3
160
2.
Use Table 2.1 to choose the required intermediate tube length, the part number and the
length of the transducer connecting tube.
3.
Make the blanking plate according to the dimensions shown in Fig. 2.2. The material
used should be steel, type ISO S355JR or equivalent.
Fig. 2.2
14 (34)
Consilium
Blanking plate material: Sheet steel type ISO S355JR

Thickness: Same as tank top
350
60 +
5
350
-0
Sea Valve Assembly

The bottom flange must first be welded into a hole cut in the ships bottom hull. The
procedures to do this are identical with the procedures for installation of the bottom flange for
the single bottom flange, see section 4.
4.
Cut a circular hole (diameter 200mm) in the tank top, vertically above the transducer
position (see fig. 2.7).
Tank top
200
15 (34)
Consilium
5.
Apply the prefabricated blanking plate over the hole in tank top. Do not weld yet!
Insert the prefabricated intermediate tube, with the upper valve flange DB welded on
top, into the blanking plate and tank top down into the double bottom to coincide with
the bottom hull flange.
Upper flange DB
Weld
Blanking plate
Tank top
Intermediate tube
Bottom flange DB
Ships Hull
16 (34)
Consilium
6.
Align the intermediate tube vertically and complete welding to the bottom hull flange,
tank top/blanking plate and blanking plate/intermediate tube.
Upper flange DB
Weld
Blanking plate
Tank top
Intermediate tube
Weld
Bottom flange DB
Ships Hull
17 (34)
Consilium
7.
Fit the zinc ring and the guide ring into the base of the bottom flange and secure with
six FS10 x 30 screws.
8.
Screw eight PS16 x 60 studs into the top of the bottom flange for the sea valve.
Mounting the sea valve on the valve flange is identical with the procedures to mount the sea
valve on the single bottom flange, see section 3 for these steps!
Stud
Upper flange DB
Blanking plate
Tank top
Intermediate tube
Bottom flange DB
Ships Hull
Zinc ring
Guide ring
Screw M10
18 (34)
Consilium
6.
Mounting Set Single Bottom (MSSB)
The mounting set single bottom is a compact version of the MSSBSV without the Sea Valve.
This mounting set is intended for installations with limited space or other circumstances
where an installation without a Sea Valve is the only alternative.
Maintenance or exchange of the transducer when using the MSSB must be done dry-docking
the vessel or when afloat sealed off by diver.
Before starting assembly check the contents of the kit against the packing list. Fig. 2.9 shows
how components fit together. The component assembly with its overall dimensions is shown
in Fig. 2.8.
Bottom flange/Transducer Assembly

The bottom flange must first be welded into a hole cut in the ships bottom hull. The
procedures to do this are identical with the procedures for installation of the bottom flange for
the MSSBSV, see section 4 notes: 1 to 4. Section 4 notes 5 and 6 will be replaced by note 5
below where the Transducer assembly is mounted directly on the Bottom flange.
Note:
5.
Place seal 1 on the flange surface. Fit the transducer assembly (see text under chapter,
transducer installation) over the eight PS16 x 60 studs, align it with the flange and
secure it with the eight M6 M16 nuts and eight M6 M16 locknuts.
Seal 1
Seal 1
Ships Hull
19 (34)
Consilium
Mounting the Transducer assembly and valve cover on Bottom flange
Transducer assembly
Valve cover
Nuts
Ships Hull
20 (34)
Consilium
7.
Transducer Installation
The transducer assembly consists of the transducer with cable, which should be fitted to the
connecting tube supplied to fit the sea valve installation.
Assemble the transducer as follows:
1.
The valve cover should be removed from the closed sea valve.
Valve cover
Blanking plate
2.
Tank top
Push the connecting tube through the valve top.

Note: It is important that the connecting tube is inserted through the top of the valve
top. If inserted through the bottom, the water seal is damaged.
Valve cover
Connecting tube
Mounting direction
3.
Assemble the nut, locking washer, washer and O-ring onto the connecting tube in the
order shown in Fig. 2.11.
21 (34)
Consilium
Valve cover
Connecting tube
O-ring
Washer
Locking washer
Nut
4.
Assemble the tube bracket in the double fork (on valve cover) and then the cable gland
on top of the connecting tube.
Double fork
Connecting tube
Cable gland
Tube bracket
22 (34)
Consilium
5.
Push the transducer cable through the connecting tube and remove the transducer
protection.
Note: from this point and forward in the instruction, the transducer must be
handled with extra care so it will not be damaged.
6.
Assemble the connecting tube and transducer, checking carefully that the slot in the
connecting tube is engaged correctly in the transducer.
Mounting direction
Connecting tube
Cable gland
Cable end
Slot
7.
Tighten the nut to secure the transducer to the connecting tube.
8. Secure the cable outlet at the upper end of the connecting tube and tighten the cable gland
around the cable.
Connecting tube
Tighten the cable gland

Cable end
Tighten the nut
23 (34)
Consilium
9.
Push the transducer assembly completely into the valve cover. Secure the transducer
temporarily by tightening the tube bracket.
Valve cover
Connecting tube
Tube bracket
The transducer head position in valvcover
24 (34)
Consilium
10.
Lower the valve top and transducer assembly carefully onto the sea valve. ENSURE
that the transducer does not touch the valve body or the valve side.
Connecting tube
Screw
Valve cover
Seal 2
Transducer head
Nuts
Sea valve
Blanking plate
Tank top
11.
Fit the valve cover to the sea valve using the eight M6S 16x60 screws and eight M6
M16 nuts and eight M6 M16 locknuts.
12.
Open the sea valve, loosen the tube bracket and carefully push the transducer assembly
down until resistance is felt (caused by the chamfered guide ring). ENSURE that the
transducer is correctly seated at its lowest possible position, and VERIFY this by
checking the transducer installation from outside the ships hull.
25 (34)
Consilium
Note: IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE TRANSDUCER IS CORRECTLY

SEATED.
Tube bracket
Flat faces towards starboard
Connecting tube
Double fork
Blanking plate
Tank top
Ships Hull
Transducer head flush with hull
13.
FULLY TIGHTEN the tube bracket to the connecting tube and the wing nuts in the
double fork.
14.
Loosen the double fork clamp around the valve cover and turn the top assembly so that
the flat section on the connecting tube faces to starboard and is parallel within 1 to
the keel line. Use a straight guide bar held against the flat section to facilitate this (see
fig 2.3). Tighten the double fork clamp at this position.
26 (34)
Consilium
15.
16.
When steps 1-13 are carried out, installation of transducer is completed, but to be
absolutely sure that the transducer is correctly seated and FLUSH WITH THE
HULL, this must be verified from outside the ship. If necessary, this must be
realigned.
The transducer cable must not be permanently installed in case of service or
replacement of defective transducer. Extra cable shall be coiled. Do not cut the cable!
Warranty is void if cable is cut.
Fig. 2.3 Orientation of Transducer Connecting Tube
Alignment of the transduser unit (TRU)
Fore
Guide bar
(held against flat
on connecting tube)
Connecting tube
(viewed from top)
"SB"
Starboard
side
Ships keel line
Stern
27 (34)
Consilium
Fig. 2.4 MSSBSV Main dimensions
740
Min 1250 mm
Free space for

mounting of Transducer
575
Ships Hull
249
28 (34)
55
200
511
450
Consilium
Fig. 2.5 MSSBSV /Part Number / Assembly Diagram
Tube bracket SAL T complete

71-19837-01
Screw MC M4x8 A4 (4 pcs)
02-03258-08
Washer
71-20069-00
Fork double SAL T complete
71-14384-01
Packing V-shaped (2 pcs)
00-00500-23
Screw M6S M16x60 (8 pcs)
71-22023-00
Valve cover SAL T

71-22183-00
Seal disk (2 pcs)
71-22186-01
Sea valve SAL T
71-22187-00
Nut ML6M M16 A4 (32 pcs)
71-22022-00
Stud PS M16x60 A4 (8 pcs)

71-22021-00
Bottom flange SB SAL T
71-22180-00
Ships Hull
Zinc ring SAL T

71-22182-00
Guide ring
71-22181-00
Screw MFS M10x30 A4 (6 pcs)

00-02104-95
SAL T MSSBSV
29 (34)
PART NUMBER
71-22190-00
Consilium
Fig. 2.6 MSDBSV Main dimensions
252
Min L+1100 mm
Free space for

575
Min50 55
200
450
Blanking plate
Ships Hull
249
30 (34)
55
L+80
Tank top
Consilium
Fig. 2.7 MSDBSV Part Number / Assembly Diagram

71-19837-01
02-03258-08
Washer
71-20069-00
71-14384-01
00-00500-23
Screw M6S M16x60 A4 (8 pcs)
71-22023-00
Valve cover SAL T

71-22183-00
Seal disk (2 pcs)
71-22186-01
Sea valve SAL T
71-22187-00
71-22022-00

71-22021-00
Sea valve flange DB SAL T
71-22185-00
Blanking plate
Tank top
Intermediate tube
"Shipyard supply"
Bottom flange DB SAL T
71-22184-00
Zinc ring SAL T
71-22182-00
Ships Hull
Guide ring SAL T

71-22181-00
Screw MFS M10x30 A4 ( 6 pcs)

00-02104-95
SAL T MSDBSV
31 (34)
PART NUMBER
71-22191-00
Consilium
Fig. 2.8 MSSB Main dimensions
Ships Hull
249
32 (34)
55
315
740
Min 865 mm
Free space for

Consilium
Fig. 2.9 MSSB Part Number / Assembly Diagram

71-19837-01
02-03258-08
Washer
71-20069-00
71-14384-01
00-00500-23
71-22022-00
Valve cover SAL T

71-22183-00
Seal disk (1 pcs)
71-22186-01
71-22021-00
Bottom flange SB SAL T
71-22180-00
Ships Hull
Zinc ring SAL T

71-22182-00
Guide ring
71-22181-00
Screw MFS M10x30 A4 (6 pcs)

00-02104-95
SAL T MSSB
33 (34)
PART NUMBER
71-22192-00
Consilium
Fig. 2.10 SAL TRU-2-2 Transducer with connecting tube assembly
Cable gland assy SAL T

71-22450-00
Tube bracket assy SAL T
71-19837-01
Connecting tube SAL T 35

71-19839-00 (Single Bottom)
71-19839-XX (Double Bottom)
XX=Length according to
order specification
Nut
71-19832-00
Locking washer/circlip
71-19834-00
Washer
71-19835-00
O-Ring 34.52x3.53
00-00730-87
Transducer SAL TRU-2-2
704400 (30m cable)
704401 (40m cable)
Transducer view from the fore of the ship
SAL TRU-2-2 sealings exchange kit (P/N 71-22220-00)

At exchange of the transducer it is recommended always to change all soft packings. The
complete kit comprises of:
2 pcs 00-00500-23
PACKING V-SHAPED /DI 137
1 pc
00-00730-87
O-RING 34,52 X 3,53
1 pc
71-22186-01
SEAL DISK
1 pc
71-22450-00
CABLE GLAND ASSY SAL T
34 (34)
Consilium
Consilium
SAL T-series
Installation of
Electronics Unit
Article No. 702313
Consilium
Installation of Electronics Unit
Art No. 702313D2
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
General............................................................................................................................................................ 3
Wiring ............................................................................................................................................................. 3
Installation of ELC .......................................................................................................................................... 3
3.1.
Selecting location................................................................................................................................. 3
3.2.
Mechanical mounting........................................................................................................................... 5
4. Downloading of new Water Track Unit software............................................................................................ 8
5. Downloading new Bottom Track Unit software.............................................................................................. 8
Revisions:
Date
2003-04-24
2003-09-11
Version
A0
A1
Author
NE
RB
2003-10-15
A2
JKW/OM
2004-03-01
A3
OM
2004-09-24
2005-02-21
2005-11-10
A4
B0
B1
UH
JL
UH
2008-01-11
2010-05-21
2010-10-29
D0
D1
D2
OM/RB
OM
OM
Comment
ELC dimension, electrical connections, Software update
refer to 706080
Change from 8mm bolts to 6mm bolts.
Added terminals number for main NMEA input.
Added terminal number for redundancy in T1 / T3 echo
sounder systems
WTU card added in electrical connection dwg.
Adapted to new T-M motherboard.
Mechanical dimensions corrected (drill hole distance).
Transducer shield instructions.
Adapted to LPU2
Company name updated
Added SAL T2+ ELC version
2 (8)
Consilium
1.
Art No. 702313D2
General
The purpose of this section is to provide enough information to have a good and reliable
installation of the Electronics Unit (ELC, T1 U/N 703400, T2 U/N 702200,
T2+ U/N 702200-01, T3 U/N 703300 or T3+ U/N 703500) in the SAL T-series Log system.
WARNING
This unit contains electrostatic sensitive devices.
Observe precautions for handling.
Note that this is only one of the manual sections needed for installation. A special and
completely stand-alone section prior to this describes the important issue of installing the
bottom parts and transducer. It should be noted that a good transducer installation is of
primary importance for achieving good performance of the log system. Selecting correct
transducer location shall be done in cooperation with Consilium Marine & Safety AB and
Consilium Marine & Safety AB must approve the selected location!
2.
Wiring
Depending on how the order was placed, a ship's specific wiring diagram may be delivered
with this manual. If not, a typical wiring diagram is included.
In general, it is sufficient to fulfil some simple rules for having good electrical connections
within the system.
The ELC shall be firmly grounded to the ship's structure.
All wires shall be electrically shielded and all signal wiring shall be twisted pairs.
For IEC 61162-1/NMEA, a cross-section of 0.50 mm is electrically sufficient, although

dimensions like 0.75 mm or more, are more common in shipyards.
3.
Installation of ELC
3.1. Selecting location

An obvious requirement for selecting a good location is the standard 30 m cable to the
transducer. This cable must have no joints via any junction box of any kind, but be connected
directly from the transducer! The ELC is designed to operate in an environment fulfilling the
requirements specified in the section Technical Specification. Recommended conditions for
the chosen location are listed below:
The location should be easily accessible for transducer replacement, calibration or other
service.
The location should be protected from weather and should offer a stable temperature not
outside the range 0 - 55C.
The location should not expose the unit for excessive vibration levels.
3 (8)
Consilium
Art No. 702313D2
The location should be far from electrical installations giving excessive electric and/or
magnetic fields, such as powerful electrical motors for ventilation, bow thrusters etc.
There must be a reasonably good way of laying the 30 m cable to the transducer in such a
way that it is possible to replace for transducer replacement.
The drawing below defines the mechanical dimensions. There must be a flat surface for
mounting and it must also be possible to fit the four bolts. Note also that there must be
enough room (400 mm free space in front of the unit) for opening the doors to access the
electronics inside and that there is room for cables below the cabinet.
Dimensions:
H: 480 mm
W: 360 mm
D: 240 mm
4 (8)
Consilium
Art No. 702313D2
3.2. Mechanical mounting

The figure below defines the position of the mounting bolts.
Drilling:
Horr: 301 mm
Vert: 421 mm
6 mm steel bolts shall be used for mounting. Use fibre or Teflon sealing to maintain water
tightness.
5 (8)
Consilium
3.3
Art No. 702313D2
Electrical connections
The electrical connection to the ELC is fairly simple in a normal installation, since the number
of cables to be connected in a standard installation is small. All connections to the ELC and
to optional LPU2 shall be made with screened cables!
FLAGS0
FLAG0
LED D
LED C
LED B
LED A
NMEA 4, Tx
NMEA 5, Rx
NMEA 2, Tx
NMEA 3 (6)
NMEA 0, Tx
NMEA 1, Rx
TMIT DIS.
Fuse:
F301: 2.5 A(SB), Backup power supply
F302: 2.5 A(SB), Backup power sypply
F305: 2.5 A(SB), Spare fuse
115VAC
MAIN
230VAC
MAIN
J8
9P-DSUB
Service
connector
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
115VAC
BACKUP
NMEA
1 (Rx
Main)
NMEA
2 (Tx
Main)
NMEA
5 (RxSG1)
NMEA
4 (TxSG1)
NMEA 0 (Tx BT) NMEA 6 (TxWT)
230VAC
BACKUP
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY
TO BE USED WHEN TWO
TRANSFORMERS ARE MOUNTED
de-energised
Transducer BT
ALARM
shown
NMEA IN / OUT
OVDC
OVDC
0VDC
Transducer WT
A
Transmit Control
Transducer BT
230VAC 230VAC
Power supply,
PowerMain
supply,
1 Main 2
(Option 115VAC)
(Option 115VAC)
Additional NMEA out

NMEA in from LPU
NMEA out to LPU
DANGER
High voltage
Earth screw
(Transducer)
Transducer cable
At least four connections shall always be used:
An extremely solid connection is to be made between the metal structure of the hull and
the grounding screw on the outside of the case. The cable area of this connection shall be
at least 10 mm, preferably using copper braid.
The AC power intake cable shall be brought to the 230 V AC terminals at the MAIN_1
intake located in the lower left end corner of the ELC. Connect to L1, L2 and GND.
The transducer cable shall be connected to terminal numbers 1 - 5 and 37 - 54. Do not cut
the cable. If the cable is cut the warranty will not be valid.
Connect terminals 1 5 to the WT connector numbered 1-5.
Connect terminals 37 54 to the BT connectors numbered 37 54.
Connect the two shield wires (red and blue) to the ground bolt (M5) in the ELC.
Connect the shield in the cable gland.
6 (8)
Consilium
Art No. 702313D2
The NMEA output cables and any other signal outputs/input should be brought through
appropriate cable glands to other users.
Main NMEA output is found on terminals 108 (A) and 109 (B).
Main NMEA input is found on terminals 105 (A) and 106 (B).
One additional NMEA out (Redundant WT) shall be connected from terminals 120 (A)
and 121 (B) to the redundancy NMEA input 5 in the LPU2, described in the SAL T-series
system drawing chapter if applicable.
When the ELC is a part of a SAL T1 or SAL T3 system, the following additional connections
shall be made to increase redundancy between Echo sounder / STW / SOG speed log parts of
the ELC. This additional connection shall also be made on the SAL T2+ version to separate
power between the STW and SOG part of the ELC.
One separately fused additional AC power intake shall be brought to the 230 V AC
terminals at the MAIN_2 (BACKUP) intake located just below the MAIN_1 intake.
Connect to L1, L2 and GND.
The cable shields for the NMEA output/input cables should be connected firmly in the LPU2
and not in the ELC.
All supplied cable glands are designed to terminate the cable shield directly to the outer
enclosure in the cable gland. This is necessary precaution to maintain the EMC protection
performance as verified in type approval testing. If more cable glands than those supplied are
needed, types designed for cable screen termination must be used!
Correct mounting of cable gland on Transducer cable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the protecting cover to expose the outer shield and outer insulation of the
cable.
Push the parts over the cable in the order shown.
Push down the screen over the top of part B
Push Cable/B part firmly into the fixed part of the cable gland.
Tighten nut A firmly.
7 (8)
Consilium
4.
Art No. 702313D2
Downloading of new Water Track Unit software
The Water Track Unit WTU or RSC860B in the ELC is delivered with the software
installed in a flash memory. If, however, an update of software would become necessary,
please refer to utility program WinFlash, 706080, available from Consilium Marine & Safety
when required.
5.
Downloading new Bottom Track Unit software
The Bottom Track Unit, T2R circuit board, in the ELC is delivered with the software installed
in a flash memory. If, however, an update of software would become necessary Please refer to
utility program WinFlash, 706080, available from Consilium Marine & Safety when required.
8 (8)
Consilium
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
LPU2
Technical Manual
Incl. installation, setting up and
maintenance guidelines
Document No. 704531
1 (52)
Consilium
Revisions
2006-09-14
2007-09-18
2008-02-12
2008-02-15
2008-07-01
A0
B0
B1
B2
B3
RB
RB
RB
AF
AF
2008-10-08 B4
2009-06-16 B5
AF
OM
2009-11-16 B6
2011-02-13 B7
RB
OM
2011-03-24 B8
OM
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Created
Document changed from Technical manual to Manual outline
Changed back to Technical Manual. First sharp edition.
Menu_O: BTR, relay+opto out MAIN and REDUN.
T- menues, Distances TRU2, Error codes in Alert-menus. System types
menu S1. GPS. System test. Opto Inputs.
Opto input functions not implemented. Service clarified. RS232 clarified.
SW ver 704580A4. Deleted filters be edited, No 38400 Baud NMEA out 223, USB FILL UP=default, IEC62288 SOG STW, Web-interface, CHECKSUMCORR->CHECKSUMTEST, Dip 1-6 defaults, K1-K4 no pulse, Logic for relay
WT- BT- DEPTH INVALID, LED code, Troubleshooting, Alert list updated.
Added tolerances to mechanical installation picture.
Added terminal 58, BT/WT->SOG/STW, indicator->display, NMEA filter and
PSALW handling corresponds to 704580A6 or later
Clarified DIP, LED S1-S4 and factory reset.
2 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Contents
1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 4
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
2
3
Technical Specification ........................................................................................................ 7

Mechanical installation......................................................................................................... 8
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4
General.............................................................................................................................9
Cabinet interior ..............................................................................................................10
List of connections.........................................................................................................10
LPU2 Table of connections by numbers summary.....................................................19
Setting up procedure ......................................................................................................... 23
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
6
7
8
Dimensions ......................................................................................................................8
Cabinet location ...............................................................................................................8
Cable inlet with EMC protection and cable support........................................................9
Grounding bolt .................................................................................................................9
Electrical installation ............................................................................................................ 9
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
5
General.............................................................................................................................4
Definitions and abbreviations ..........................................................................................4
Principle of operation.......................................................................................................4
Block Diagram .................................................................................................................6
Accessing the LPU2 Menu system ................................................................................23

LPU2 Menus ..................................................................................................................26
Menu system via Web interface.....................................................................................34
Menu function summary ................................................................................................35
NMEA filtering.................................................................................................................... 38
Testing Procedure ............................................................................................................. 40
Service and maintenance .................................................................................................. 41
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
Supervision and alert numbers.......................................................................................41

Service modes and DIP switches ...................................................................................43
Performing updating sequence.......................................................................................43
Performing factory reset ................................................................................................44
USB................................................................................................................................45
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................45
Annex 1 .................................................................................................................................... 47
9 Web-interface .................................................................................................................... 47
9.1
9.2
9.3
Start window ..................................................................................................................47

Menu A window ............................................................................................................47
Display NMEA pop-up window ....................................................................................49
Annex 2 .................................................................................................................................... 50
10 Wiring principles ................................................................................................................ 50
3 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
1 Introduction
1.1 General
This document describes the LPU2 (2nd generation Log Processing Unit), which serves as an
interconnection device between SAL speed logs, SD4-x displays, indicators and other users,
such as ARPA, auto-pilots etc.
IEC61162/NMEA serial signals and how to connect cables carrying IEC61162-signals is
described in document 700164
1.2 Definitions and abbreviations

The new performance standard IMO MSC.191(79) states that standardized terms and
definitions shall be used. The SAL speed logs have historically used the terms Bottom Track
(BT) for Speed Over the Ground (SOG) and Water Track (WT) for Speed Through the Water
(STW) related information. This document introduces the SOG and STW terms, but due to
backward compatibility and existing menu system, both terms exist.
Abbreviation
SDx
SD4
NMEA0183
STW
WT
WTL
WTT
SOG
BT
BTL
BTT
TRIP
TOTAL
SAL T-series
ELC
ESD
ESD2
Description
Serial Display family, e.g. SD1-x, SD2-x, SD4-x
Serial Display 4 generation, e.g. SD4-1, SD4-2, SD4-5
IEC61162-1 ed2 serial interface standard
Speed Trough the Water.
This is equivalent to Water Track (WT) speed (relative)
Water Track resulting speed or distance (relative)
Water Track Longitudinal and may refer to both
speed and distance
Water Track Transverse and may refer to both
speed or distance
Speed Over the Ground.
This is equivalent to Bottom Track (BT) speed (true)
Bottom Track resulting speed or distance (true)
Bottom Track Longitudinal and may refer to both
speed and distance
Bottom Track Transverse speed or distance
Trip distance counter
Total distance counter
Combined SOG and STW log
Electrical cabinet (SAL R1a, T1, T2, T2s, T2+, T3, T3+)
Echo sounder display, first generation
Echo sounder display, 2nd generation
1.3 Principle of operation

The LPU2 distributes data between connected units (instruments etc.) in the SAL speed log
system, as well as it transmits speed and depth data to external systems. Serial speed/depth data
from one or more speed logs is received by the LPU2 and decoded to generate serial data as
well as speed pulse signals. A large number of output connections are programmable.
4 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
However, a default configuration is active on delivery and shall be used whenever possible.
The unit is equipped with a power supply, able to provide power to SD4 displays as well as to
an SAL Echo Sounder Display.
The LPU2 is also used for docking log calculations. The output from a Rate Of Turn gyro can
be connected to the LPU2 via serial (NMEA) or analogue input. From this input and the
received SOG from the SAL speed log, the LPU2 calculates transversal speeds of both ends of
the ship, which can be fed to SD4-5 docking-log displays.
The SD4 Log Remote Control is used to access the menu system in the LPU2 as well as in
connected speed logs. This SD4 shall be labeled as a Speed Log Master Display according to
instructions in the SD4 chapter.
The LPU2 is equipped with an Ethernet connection (RJ45) to access the LPU2 web-interface.
This web-interface can be used to access the LPU2 menu system, display in/out going NMEA
messages, display alert lists, and for other service purposes.
The LPU2 software is contained in Flash-memory, which can be updated on board from a USB
memory stick or using the serial D-sub.
Note 1: The SAL T1 or T2s system does not calculate transversal speed over ground and will
therefore not be used in docking log systems.
Note 2: When the LPU2 is used together with a SAL R1a (speed trough water log system),
please disregard from all information referring to BT/SOG, transverse speed or docking log
functionality.
5 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
1.4 Block Diagram
NMEA0183 data
ROT -gyro
In do cking -lo g
System s o nl y
Analog (option)
NMEA/R S 422
Lo g p roce ssing un it ( LP U2)

Un it n um be r:70 45 00
N MEA/ RS 422
E cho S ou nd er D ispla y
(E S D2)
In T3 /T1 system s on ly
DC Power
NMEA0183 data
Ma nd ato ry con ne cti ons in SA L

T1 /T3 com bin ed sp ee d lo g &
e cho sou nd er systems
4 c hange over c ont ac ts

4 c losi ng contacts
8 opto c ouplers
2 analog outputs
23 NMEA 0183 outputs for
SD4 displays and ot her
NMEA lis teners
9 power outputs for
indic ators, 12-28 VDC
24V DC out put s f or ESD ,
ROT-gyro etc
9 N MEA 0183 inputs from
speed log, SD4 m ain
display and other N MEA
talk ers
4 Opto inputs for c ont rol
signals
1 RS 232 port for
older ESD / MFD
NMEA 0183
S er ial Di gital D ispla y, S D4

S pee d Log M as ter Displa y
L og R emo te Con trol
DC Power
Redundant Power
N MEA0183 dat a
DC Power
S D4- 2 di spla y
S TW/SO G disp lay
NMEA0183 data
D C Power
SD 4-5 Displ ay
Docki ng lo g d ispl ay
N MEA0183 data out

NMEA0183 data
SA L T- seri es
or
SA L R 1a
spe ed log
(1 NM EA ou t)
N MEA 0183
D C Power
Dig ital Disp la y S D1/2

Ol de r ge ne ratio n
N MEA0183 redundant
Ana. out 0.1V/k not

DC Power
SAL Transducer wit h
30m c able
A na log ue Sp ee d
Ind icato r SIA -2- 8
N MEA0183 data
NME A Co nsu me r
200p/ NM
20 0p /NM Con sum er

Intake AC Power
This block diagram shows the general layout of the system. Data is received from the SAL
T-series speed log and the Rate Of Turn gyro, alternatively a SAL R1a speed log can be used if
only speed through water is required. Processing is done in the LPU2, which also serves as data
distribution/interfacing unit. The exact wiring depends on each installation, depending on
which displays are needed, what turn-rate gyro is used etc.
6 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
2 Technical Specification
Mechanical specification
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
500 mm + 60 mm under the cabinet for cable glands

500 mm
211.5 mm
19.7 kg
Electrical specification
Power intake:
1
Power
consumption:
SD display power
9
output terminals:
ESD power output: 1
Serial inputs:
Analogue inputs:
Opto inputs:
Serial output
terminals:
Serial terminal:
Analogue outputs:
Switching relay
outputs:
Closing relay
outputs:
Opto outputs:
Ethernet
connection
USB Device
USB Host
Service D-sub
110115 VAC / 220230 VAC +/-10% 50-60 Hz

150 VA Maximum, typically 15 VA with 3 pcs SD4 connected
or typically 50 VA with a ESD2 and 3 pcs SD4 connected
12..28 VDC-outputs distributed over three fuses:
3 x 1A. Maximum total output load 3A
18..32 VDC outputs distributed over one fuse. 1+2 spare terminals
Maximum total output load: 1.5A
9 Standard IEC61162-1 / NMEA0183
1 +/-10 V
4 Digital inputs that can detect a voltage above
3.5 V, maximum voltage 40 VDC
23 IEC61162-1 / NMEA0183, totally 13 drivers
(Divided into 8 channels)
1 RS232 For older generation ESD, in/out
2 +/-5VDC, max load 10 mA
4 Switching: 30VDC / 1A
Note! Not intended for distance pulses.
4 Closing: 50VDC / 0.5A
30V/30mA or 15V/100mA recommended max load when used as
distance pulse relays.
8 5 to 40 VDC, max 50 mA
1 RJ45, DHCP server.
To access the LPU2 the web-interface, service purpose / setting up
1 The USB Device slot is not used.
2 Only the lower USB Host 1 slot is used
1 RS232 for service purpose; terminal, Winflash.
Environmental specification
Enclosure material:
Enclosure protection:
EMC:
Heat dissipation (max)
Colour:
Recommended operating
temperature
Extreme operating temperature:
Extreme operating Humidity:
Steel plate
IP22, splash proof
IEC 60945, protected class
= Power consumption
RAL 7035
0C to +40 C
-15C to +55 C
Less than 93 % RH (non condensing) at 40C
7 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
3 Mechanical installation
The LPU2 is mounted in an
IP22 drip-proof cabinet. All
cables are brought into the case
via cable glands in the bottom
plate. Steel bolts in the
dimension M8 shall be used for
mounting. To assure that the
cabinet is drip-proof, nylon
washers must be used to seal
the fixing holes.
3.1 Dimensions
LPU2 ELC:
500 x 500 x 212mm (H x W x D) + 60 mm under the LPU2 for cable gland.
NOTE: When mounting, reserve a space of at least 150 mm under the cabinet for cable routing.
3.2 Cabinet location
The LPU2 cabinet shall be vertically mounted in a location where necessary cabling
from bridge equipment can be brought to the unit, preferably on the bridge or a space
close to the bridge.
The location must have space enough to give sufficient space and accessibility for
service of the unit.
The location shall be protected from weather and shall offer a stable temperature.
The location shall not expose the unit to excessive vibration levels.
The location shall be far from electrical installations giving excessive electric and/or
magnetic fields.
The cabinet bottom shall be placed approximately 1.2 m from the floor where practical.
Compass safe distance 2 meters.
8 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
3.3 Cable inlet with EMC protection and cable support

18 pieces EMC protected tubes with inside diameter 20mm are mounted on the bottom plate.
More than one cable can be routed through each tube. On the inside of the cabinet each tube is
equipped with a clamp plate for fixation of the cable screen. Cable support is provided by
tighten a cable tie (zip tie), in the slit on the bottom of the tube, round the cable and the tube.
3.4 Grounding bolt

The bottom plate is equipped with a grounding bolt, which shall be connected to the metal
structure of the ships hull. The cable area of this connection shall be at least10mm2, preferably
using copper braid.
4 Electrical installation
4.1 General
To simplify the reading of this instruction, IEC61162/NMEA serial signals are named just
NMEA.
Closer information about IEC61162/NMEA serial signals and how to connect cables carrying
IEC61162.signals is described in document 700164.
Also see Appendix 2 (Wiring Principles) below.
All cables shall be brought into the case via the provided cable inlet tubes in the bottom plate
and all screens shall be properly terminated in the inlet tube clamp plate.
The cable screens between the SAL Speed log ELC and the LPU2 should only be connected to
the LPU2 and not to the SAL ELC. Use a shielded cable with twisted pairs to connect the SAL
Speed Log ELC to the LPU2.
The connection terminals are positioned on the IO-PCB and the PSU-PCB. Terminals that are
stacked on top of each other have the same number with an extra letter or mark, indicating
column. For example NMEA in 1 has terminal numbers 1A, 1B and 1C, Opto out 1 has
terminal numbers 28+ and 28-.
The terminals are designed for cable areas with a cross-section from 0,5mm to maximum 2,5
mm terminated without end caps.
9 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
4.2 Cabinet interior
The transformer and three Printed Circuit Boards are mounted on a plate inside the cabinet. The
top PCB (CPU-PCB) is covered with a protection plate, in which holes are made for USB,
Ethernet and RS232 connectors as well as the red 2 x LED digits. Also the Reboot pushbutton
and the DIP switches are accessible without removing the front plate. All connection terminals
are found on the two uncovered boards (IO- and PSU- PCB).
4.3 List of connections

Main power, 115 or 230 VAC (on PSU-PCB)
Term#
71
72
73
74
Function
230 V AC
115 V AC
N Neutral
Protective ground
Note
L1
(L1 if not 71 is connected)
L2
GND
Only one of the terminals 71 or 72 shall be connected. When powered from 230VAC, terminal
71-73-74 shall be used and the transformer connector shall be plugged into the 230 VAC
contact.
If powered from 115 VAC, terminal 72-73-74 shall be used and the transformer connector shall
be plugged into the 115 VAC contact.
10 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
The main fuses are positioned next to the main power terminals.
NOTE: There is no main switch. To switch the LPU2 AC power off, remove the fuses.
Connections to Log 1 ELC
Term#
1A
1B
42A
42B
Function
NMEA in 1
NMEA in 1
NMEA out 7
NMEA out 7
Note
Connect to T-Series speed Log NMEA "A" output
Connect to T-Series speed Log NMEA "B" output
Connect to Log control NMEA "A" input
Connect to Log control NMEA "B" input
The NMEA in 1 connects to the NMEA out terminal 108 and 109 on the SAL T-Series speed
log ELC.
4.3.1 NOTE! NMEA in 1 is not to be used if Log 1 is a SAL R1a!
NMEA in 1 is supervised by the LPU2: if there is no NMEA the relay K1 will drop.
NMEA out 7 (terminal 42) connects to the NMEA in terminal on the SAL Speed log ELC,
SAL T-series and R1a.
Redundancy connections to Log 1 ELC
Term# Function
5A
NMEA in 5
5B
NMEA in 5
Note
Connect to Log NMEA "A" output (redundancy)
Connect to Log NMEA "B" output (redundancy)
SAL T-series: NMEA in 5 connects to the redundancy NMEA output (Redundant STW) in
Log 1 terminal 120 and 121. This will improve the redundancy of the system. Even if the LPU2
and/or the speed over ground log are malfunctioning, at least speed trough water will still be
presented on the redundancy outputs.
SAL R1a: NMEA in 5 connects to the NMEA output on the SAL R1a ELC.
NMEA in 5 is supervised by the LPU2 if there is no NMEA the relay K2 will drop.
Also refer to typical Connection diagrams in the system drawing section.
This connection (Redundant STW) has to be made when a SAL T1 or T3 system is installed to
ensure the redundancy between the speed log part and the echo sounder part of the combined
SAL T1 / T3 Speed log / Echo sounder system.
Connections to Log 2 ELC (option)
Term#
2A
2B
43A
43B
Function
NMEA in 2
NMEA in 2
NMEA out 8
NMEA out 8
Note
Connect to Log NMEA "A" output
Connect to Log NMEA "B" output
Connect to Log control NMEA "A" input
Connect to Log control NMEA "B" input
A second SAL Speed Log can be connected to the LPU2. The NMEA in 2 and NMEA out 8
shall be connected to the NMEA connections of the Log 2 ELC via a twisted pair cable.
Connection to gyro (if docking-log option is used)
11 (52)
Consilium
Term# Function
3A
NMEA in 3
3B
NMEA in 3
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Note
Connect to NMEA "A" output terminal from gyro
Connect to NMEA "B" output terminal from gyro
Instead of a serial NMEA interface an analogue signal can be used to obtain rate of turn
information from the gyro.
Term#
Function
Note
17 Sign.
Analogue in
Connect to analogue output signal from gyro
17 0VDC Analogue in
Connect to signal ground from gyro
Note! The gyro output impedance may not exceed 150 when using the analogue input.
Connections to ESD2
In SAL T1, T3 and T3+ systems an ESD2, Echo Sounder Display 2nd, is used to present a
graphical view of the depth, handle depth alarms, store historical depth data and such. The
ESD2 is connected to the LPU2 over an NMEA / 422 interface.
NMEA interface (1st option for ESD2 connection) and power to ESD
Term#
4A
4B
36A
36B
47+
Function
NMEA in 4
NMEA in 4
NMEA out 1
NMEA out 1
+18 to 32 VDC
Note
Connect to NMEA "A" output from ESD2 (COM4, D9 #2)
Connect to NMEA "B" output from ESD2 (COM4, D9 #7)
Connect to NMEA "A" input to ESD2 (COM 4, D9 #8)
Connect to NMEA "B" input to ESD2 (COM 4, D9 #3)
Connect to DC power input of ESD with a separate DC power
cable. Fuse F304
470 VDC
cable.
The DC power cable shall have a cross section of at least 1.5 mm2
NMEA out 1 will be directly connected, via redundancy relays, to NMEA in 1 (the main input
from speed log1) in case of loss of power or a failure in the LPU2.
Term# Function
48+
+18 to 32 VDC
48-
0 VDC
49+
+18 to 32 VDC
49-
0 VDC
Note
cable. Spare terminal, Fuse F304
cable. Spare terminal.
cable. Spare terminal. Fuse F304
cable. Spare terminal.
RS232 interface (2nd option for older ESD connection)
Term# Function
Note
10
RS232 In (Rx)
Connect to pin 3 in 9-pole D-sub on ESD display
11
RS232 GND
12
RS232 Out (Tx)
Terminal 12 has same function as NMEA out 1.
Terminal 10 and terminal 4 has same function and can therefore not be used simultaneously.
12 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
SD4 Log remote control Speed Log Master Display and redundancy displays
Term#
37A
37B
6A
6B
50+
50-
Function
NMEA out 2
NMEA out 2
NMEA in 6
NMEA in 6
+12 to 28 VDC
0 VDC
Note
Connect to SD4 NMEA "A" input
Connect to SD4 NMEA "B" input
Connect to SD4 NMEA "A" output
Connect to SD4 NMEA "B" output
Connect to DC power input of display. Fuse F301
Connect to DC power input of display
The speed logs and the LPU2 menu system can be remotely accessed for calibration and setup
of parameters from an SD4 display such as SD4-2.
The NMEA out 2 and NMEA in 6 shall be connected to the NMEA in and out connections of
the SD4 via a twisted pair cable. It is recommended to use a shielded cable with four twisted
pairs to connect the SD4 to the LPU2, two pairs for NMEA, one pair for power and one pair as
spare. NMEA out 2 will be directly connected, via redundancy relays, to NMEA in 5 (the
redundancy output of speed log1) in case of loss of power or a failure in the LPU2.
2nd SD4 Log remote control
Term#
44A
44B
7A
7B
51+
51
Function
NMEA out 9
NMEA out 9
NMEA in 7
NMEA in 7
+12 to 28 VDC
0 VDC
Note
Connect to SD4 NMEA "A" output
Connect to SD4 NMEA "B" output
A 2nd SD4 remote control can be connected to the system. It will have the same remote control
functionality as the Speed log master display.
GPS input
Term# Function
8A
NMEA in 8
8B
NMEA in 8
Note
Connect to GPS NMEA "A" output
Connect to GPS NMEA "B" output
GPS info received is only used for diagnostic purpose. This is an optional but recommended
connection with the intention to simplify troubleshooting of the speed log system.
Alarm Acknowledge input
Term# Function
Note
9A
NMEA in 9
Connect to bridge alarm panel
9B
NMEA in 9
Connect to bridge alarm panel
If an NMEA alarm ($xxALR,,,A,V,) is sent out from the LPU2 to the bridge alarm panel, the
alarm can be acknowledged using NMEA in 9.
E.g. to acknowledge an ESD alarm such as: $SDALR,,150,A,V,Shallow alarm, a
corresponding: $SDACK,,150 shall be sent to this input from the central alarm panel.
13 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Digital inputs (opto-isolated)
Term# Function
Note
13+
OPTO in1
Mute external ESD alarm, relay K4
13OPTO in1
When Opto in 1 is activated, external ESD alarm relay K4 is energized (mute).
Only valid in SAL T1 or T3 systems.
Term# Function
Note
14+
OPTO in2
LOG 1 SOG silent mode
14OPTO in2
When Opto in 2 is activated, the acoustic transmission from the SOG part of log 1 stops, if
applicable.
Term# Function
Note
15+
OPTO in3
Echo sounder 2 MAIN
15OPTO in3
When Opto in 3 is activated ES 2 (LOG 2) becomes the active Echo Sounder.
Term# Function
Note
16+
OPTO in4
LOG 2 MAIN
16OPTO in4
When activated LOG 2 becomes the active log
Input choices:
ALARM MUTE
LOG 2 MAIN
ES 2 MAIN
LOG 1 SOG MUTE
LOG 2 SOG MUTE
These electrical inputs are galvanic separated from the LPU2 by opto couplers. The OPTO
inputs can detect an input voltage above 3,5VDC. Maximum input voltage is 40VDC.
NMEA out 10 15, connections to NMEA slave displays SD4/SD1/SD2
Provisions are made to connect NMEA output and DC power to SD4 or SD1/SD2 slave
displays. In total, including the Speed log master display, a maximum of 9 (nine)
SD4/SD1/SD2 displays can be powered from the LPU2.
Term#
45A
45B
52+
52-
Function
NMEA out 10
NMEA out 10
+12 to 28 VDC
0 VDC
Note
Term#
46A
46B
53+
Function
NMEA out 11
NMEA out 11
+12 to 28 VDC
Note
Connect to DC power input of display. Fuse 302
14 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Term# Function
530 VDC
Note
Term#
59A
59B
54+
54-
Function
NMEA out 12
NMEA out 12
+12 to 28 VDC
0 VDC
Note
Term#
60A
60B
55+
55-
Function
NMEA out 13
NMEA out 13
+12 to 28 VDC
0 VDC
Note
Term#
61A
61B
56+
56-
Function
NMEA out 14
NMEA out 14
+12 to 28 VDC
0 VDC
Note
Term#
62A
62B
57+
57-
Function
NMEA out 15
NMEA out 15
+12 to 28 VDC
0 VDC
Note
Term# Function
58+
+12 to 28 VDC
580 VDC
Note
Connect to DC power input of display. Spare terminal. Fuse F303
The NMEA out A and B shall be connected to the NMEA in connections of the SD4 displays
via a twisted pair cable. It is recommended to use a shielded cable with two twisted pairs to
connect the slave SD displays to the LPU2, one pair for NMEA and one pair for power.
NMEA out 3 6 and 16 23, connections to external NMEA listeners
12 external NMEA listeners can be connected to the LPU2. Out 3 6 share driver and will be
directly connected to NMEA in 5 (the redundancy output of speed log1) in case of loss of
power or a failure in the LPU2.
Term# Function
38A
NMEA out 3
38B
NMEA out 3
Note
Connect to external NMEA listener, NMEA "A" input
Connect to external NMEA listener, NMEA "B" input
Term# Function
39A
NMEA out 4
39B
NMEA out 4
Note
15 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Term# Function
40A
NMEA out 5
40B
NMEA out 5
Note
Term# Function
41A
NMEA out 6
41B
NMEA out 6
Note
Term# Function
63A
NMEA out 16
63B
NMEA out 16
Note
Term# Function
64A
NMEA out 17
64B
NMEA out 17
Note
Term# Function
65A
NMEA out 18
65B
NMEA out 18
Note
Term# Function
66A
NMEA out 19
66B
NMEA out 19
Note
Term# Function
67A
NMEA out 20
67B
NMEA out 20
Note
Term# Function
68A
NMEA out 21
68B
NMEA out 21
Note
Term# Function
69A
NMEA out 22
69B
NMEA out 22
Note
Term# Function
70A
NMEA out 23
70B
NMEA out 23
Note
16 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Connections to relays and opto coupler outputs
There are 16 outputs of this kind: 4 switching relays, 4 closing relays and 8 opto couplers. The
function of each relay/opto output can be programmed into the LPU2, using the commands and
procedures defined in section 5, "Setting up Procedure".
Note! The switching relays K1-K4 are not intended for distance pulse function. First choice for
pulse function is opto O1-O8, second K5-K8. Warranty can not be claimed if K1, K2, K3 or K4
are used for distance pulse function.
Switching relays (NC=normally closed contact, CM=common, NO=normally open contact)
Relay# Term#
Default signal
K1
20:NC 20:CM 20:NO No NMEA Log 1 Main = de-energized
K2
21:NC 21:CM 21:NO No NMEA Log 1 Redundancy = de-energized
K3
22:NC 22:CM 22:NO STW Astern = energized
K4
23:NC 23:CM 23:NO ESD Alarm = de-energized
When energized, the corresponding LED will be lit and CM-NO will be electrically connected.
In case of power fail of the LPU2, position NC-CM for the relays K1-K4 is valid.
The relays K1 and K2 supervise the NMEA in 1 and 5. The relays will be de-energized for no
NMEA activity.
Relay K3 will be energised when STW indicates astern speed.
Relay K4 will be de-energized when an Echo sounder alarm occurs ($SDALR,,,A,V,) until
acknowledged ($SDALR,,,A,A,).
Relay K4 can therefore be used as a contact for an external ESD buzzer.
If Opto in 1 is activated, K4 will be energized (external ESD buzzer mute).
If no SAL ESD is connected to the LPU2 the relay is de-energized.
Closing relays (NO=normally open contact, CM=common)
Relay# Term#
Default signal
K5
24:CM 24:NO
Speed through water longitudinal 200p/nm, STW
K6
25:CM 25:NO
Speed through water longitudinal 200p/nm, STW
K7
26:CM 26:NO
Speed over ground resulting 200p/nm, BTR
K8
27:CM 27:NO
Speed over ground resulting 200p/nm, BTR
If no transversal SOG (BTT) is available such as in SAL T2s and T1 systems, all BTR outputs
will be calculated as if BTT=0, thus BTR outputs will be equal to BTL. This is applicable for
analogue out, pulse relays and opto-couplers.
17 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Opto-couplers
Opto#
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
Term#
28+ 2829+ 2930+ 3031+ 3132+ 3233+ 3334+ 3435+ 35-
Default signal
Speed through water longitudinal 200 p/nm, WTL
Speed over ground resulting 200 p/nm, BTR
Analogue outputs
Output
Ana out 1
Ana out 2
Term#
18:Sign 18:0VDC
19:Sign 19:0VDC
Default signal
Speed through water longitudinal 0.1 V/knot, WTL
Speed over ground resulting 0.1 V/knot, BTR
18 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
4.4 LPU2 Table of connections by numbers summary

4.4.1 Terminals on I/O PCB:
Terminal
1A
1B
1C
2A
2B
2C
3A
3B
3C
4A
4B
4C
5A
5B
6A
6B
Name
In 1 A
In 1 B
Function
Default use
NMEA in 1
Speed log 1 Main, NOT R1a
Not to be used
In 2 A
In 2 B
NMEA in 2
Speed log 2
Not to be used
In 3 A
In 3 B
NMEA in 3
Gyro (ROT)
Not to be used
In 4 A
In 4 B
NMEA in 4
ESD2
Not to be used
In 5 A
In 5 B
In 6 A
In 6 B
NMEA in 5
Speed log 1 Redundancy/R1a
NMEA in 6
SD4 Log remote control Speed Log Master Display
19 (52)
Consilium
Terminal
7A
7B
8A
8B
9A
9B
10
11
12
13 +
13 14 +
14 15 +
15 16 +
16 17 Sign
17 0VDC
18 Sign
18 0VDC
19 Sign
19 0VDC
20 NC
20 CM
20 NO
21 NC
21 CM
21 NO
22 NC
22 CM
22 NO
23 NC
23 CM
23 NO
24 CM
24 NO
25 CM
25 NO
26 CM
26 NO
27 CM
27 NO
28 +
28 29 +
29 30 +
30 31 +
31 -
Name
In 7 A
In 7 B
In 8 A
In 8 B
In 9 A
In 9 B
In (Rx)
GND
Out(Tx)
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Function
Default use
NMEA in 7
SD4 Log remote control
NMEA in 8
GPS for diagnostic purpose
NMEA in 9
Alarm Ack.
RS232 In
RS232 GND
RS232 Out
Older Echo Sounder Display

(Tx = Channel 0)
Opto in1
External ESD Alarm mute, relay K4
Opto in2
LOG 1 bottom track mute
Opto in3
Echo sounder 2 MAIN
Opto in4
LOG 2 MAIN
Analogue in
ROT Gyro (+-10V)
Ana out 1
Speed through water longitudinal, 0.1V/knot
Ana out 2
Speed over ground resulting, 0.1V/knot
K1
K2
K3
K4
Normally Closed
Common
Normally Open
Normally Closed
Common
Normally Open
Normally Closed
Common
Normally Open
Normally Closed
Common
Normally Open
No NMEA Log 1 Main
No NMEA Log 1 Redundancy / R1a
STW Astern
External ESD Alarm
K5
Speed through water longitudinal 200p/nm
K6
K7
Speed over ground resulting 200p/nm
K8
Opto 1
Opto 2
Opto 3
Opto 4
20 (52)
Consilium
Terminal
32 +
32 33 +
33 34 +
34 35 +
35 36 A
36 B
36 C
37 A
37 B
38 A
38 B
Name
LPU2
Function
Art No. 704531B8
Default use
Opto 5
Opto 6
Opto 7
Opto 8
Out 1 A
Out 1 B
ESD2
(Channel 0)
NMEA out 1 (redundancy)

Not to be used
Out 2 A
Out 2 B
Out 3 A
Out 3 B

(Out 3-6 share driver)
SD4 Log remote control Speed Log Master Display

(Channel 1)
Connects to external NMEA listeners
(Channel 2)
39 A
39 B
Out 4 A
Out 4 B


(Channel 2)
40 A
40 B
Out 5 A
Out 5 B


(Channel 2)
41 A
41 B
Out 6 A
Out 6 B


(Channel 2)
42 A
42 B
Out 7 A
Out 7 B
NMEA out 7
Log 1
(Channel 3)
43 A
43 B
Out 8 A
Out 8 B
NMEA out 8
Log 2
(Channel 4)
44 A
44 B
Out 9 A
Out 9 B
NMEA out 9
2nd SD4 Log remote control

(Channel 5)
45 A
45 B
Out 10 A
Out 10 B
NMEA out 10
SD display
(Channel 6)
46 A
46 B
Out 11 A
Out 11 B
NMEA out 11
SD display
(Channel 6)
47 +
47 48 +
48 49 +
49 50 +
50 51 +
51 52 +
52 53 +
53 54 +
54 -
18-32 VDC
Power for Echo Sounder Display, ESD. Fuse F304
18-32 VDC
Spare. Fuse F304
18-32 VDC
Spare. Fuse F304
12-28 VDC
Power for SD display. Fuse F301
12-28 VDC
12-28 VDC
12-28 VDC
12-28 VDC
21 (52)
Consilium
Name
12-28 VDC
LPU2
Function
Art No. 704531B8
Terminal
55 +
55 56 +
56 57 +
57 58 +
58 59 A
59 B
Default use
Out 12 A
Out 12 B
NMEA out 12
SD display
(Channel 6)
60 A
60 B
Out 13 A
Out 13 B
NMEA out 13
SD display
(Channel 6)
61 A
61 B
Out 14 A
Out 14 B
NMEA out 14
SD display
(Channel 6)
62 A
62 B
Out 15 A
Out 15 B
NMEA out 15
SD display
(Channel 6)
63 A
63 B
Out 16 A
Out 16 B
NMEA out 16

(Channel 7)
64 A
64 B
Out 17 A
Out 17 B
NMEA out 17

(Channel 7)
65 A
65 B
Out 18 A
Out 18 B
NMEA out 18

(Channel 7)
66 A
66 B
Out 19 A
Out 19 B
NMEA out 19

(Channel 7)
67 A
67 B
Out 20 A
Out 20 B
NMEA out 20

(Channel 7)
68 A
68 B
Out 21 A
Out 21 B
NMEA out 21

(Channel 7)
69 A
69 B
Out 22 A
Out 22 B
NMEA out 22

(Channel 7)
70 A
70 B
Out 23 A
Out 23 B
NMEA out 23

(Channel 7)
12-28 VDC
12-28 VDC
12-28 VDC
22 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
4.4.2 Terminals on PSU PCB:
Terminal
71
72
73
74
Name
230 VAC
115 VAC
N
GND
Function
230 VAC Power supply (L1)
115 VAC Power supply (L1 Option)
Neutral (L2)
Ground
Note
Fuse F101
Fuse F102
Fuse F103
5 Setting up procedure
The LPU2 has an internal menu system that can be accessed via a remote SD4 Speed Log
Master Display or via the web-interface. At setup the menu system is used for:
1) changing the default setup of input- and output channels. See Menu I, N and O.
2) enter speed log transducer (TRU) position to enable docking log calculations. See Menu
S on page 30.
3) enter system type: T-Series, R1a or Dual Log. See Menu S on page 30.
4) access the internal alert list for troubleshooting. See Menu A on page 26.
The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and will therefore also be active after a reboot
or power shut-down. After the setting up is finished and the system is tested, no further actions
are required during normal operation.
5.1 Accessing the LPU2 Menu system

The LPU2 Menu system is accessed from an SD4 Speed Log Master Display unit or the webinterface. Here follows a short guide to access the menu system in the LPU2 via the Speed Log
Master Display. (For a detailed description of the menu system in the SD4 Master Display, see
document 704005 SD4 Technical description.)
5.1.1 Reaching SD4 Menu Mode
The Mode window of the SD4 Display can be set to Menu Mode, which is used for internal
settings of the display and can be used to connect to a remote unit such as the LPU2.
23 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
The Menu Mode is reached by pressing the Mode button for minimum 5 sec. The Mode
Window will show the text PRESS ENTER FOR MENU. Then press the Enter button (4th
button from left) within 5 seconds.
The Mode Window will now show the start menu in the SD4. The six buttons under the Mode
Window have now got alternative functions. The alternative functions are lit in red text below
relevant button.
The buttons now have the following functions:
Mode: 1st button from left. Will inform which remote device is connected in remote mode.
Esc:
2nd button from left. The Escape function is used in the Remote Device menu to
escape from the menu system in a remotely connected unit (E.g. the LPU2 menu
system) and step back to the local menu system in the SD4 unit.
Menu: 3rd button from left. Is used alone, or together with the Minus (-) button, or together
with the Enter button, to move in the menus as described below.
Menu button alone, will display next menu i.e. step forward on same menu level.
Menu button and Minus (-) buttons pressed simultaneously will display previous
menu, i.e. step back on the same menu level.
Menu button and Enter buttons pressed simultaneously will move up one menu level,
except when leaving the Remote Device menu. (see Esc-button)
Enter:
4th button from left is used to store changed values or to move to sub-menus.
- +
Minus button and Plus button are used to change values or status (E.g. write
access OFF/ON) and /or to change device values.
Note: The Menu System will exit automatically if no button has been pressed for 5 minutes
when being in the local SD4 Menu System, when connected to a remote device there is no
timeout and the Escape button must be used to exit from a remotely connected device.
5.1.2 SD4 in Menu Mode
The Menu Mode in the SD4 has three Local Menus and one Remote Device menu:
SD4 LOCAL. This is the start menu when entering the Menu Mode. If one or more
other displays are remotely dimmed from the display, this menu shows a second text
line were the remote dimming function can easily be turned ON/OFF.
LP0 PROPERTIES. This menu contains sub menus for local setting up of the display.
Note: Do not turn write access ON without special training.
LS0 REMOTE SETUP. This menu contains sub menus for setting up when the display
is used as a Speed log Master Display /Remote Device for other units and displays.
Note: Do not turn write access ON without special training
R0 REMOTE DEV. On designated Speed Log Master Displays this menu provides
access to a remote device, e.g. the WTU-unit, BTU-unit or the LPU2 menu structure.
Note: Verify that the setting in SD4 menu LS7 is R0 REMOTE ENABLED [ON]
to be able to connect to remote devices.
To connect to the menu system in the LPU2:
24 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
When in SD4 LOCAL (the start menu) step to R0 REMOTE DEV menu by pressing the
MENU button three times.
When pressing ENTER in the R0 menu the SD4 will establish communication with all
connected equipment and display them in a list of menu choices.
Press the MENU button until the LPU is displayed and press ENTER to start communicating
with the LPU2.
ESC is used to step back.
Example of a menu walk in the R0 REMOTE DEV menu:
R0 REMOTE DEV CONNECT
press[Enter]
SYNCHRONISING
(counting down from 5)
wait 3 seconds
R1 DEVICE 1 OF 3
BTU 1
(T2A)
press[MENU]
R2 DEVICE 2 OF 3
LPU 1
(LP1)
press[ENTER]
W+XX.X DXXX.X
BL+XX.X T+X.XX
Access to the main menu in the LPU2. Press MENU to go

deeper into the LPU2 menu system. To exit back to local
mode in the SD4 the ESC button must be used. The ESC
button will always step out of the remotely controlled
menu system.
MENU+ENTER is used to step back within the remotely
controlled menu system.
press[ESC]
R2 DEVICE 2 OF 3
LPU 1
(LP1)
press[ESC or MENU+ENTER]
R0 REMOTE DEV
CONNECT
25 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
5.2 LPU2 Menus

The function of each menu in the LPU2 is defined below.
5.2.1 Main Menu
W+XX.X DXXX
BL+XX.X T+X.XX
W+XX.X:
DXXX:
BL+XX.X:
T+X.XX:
Longitudinal water speed, X.XX or XX.X knots.

Depth in meters below transducer. XXX or XX.X.
Longitudinal ground speed, X.XX or XX.X knots.
Transversal ground speed, X.XX or XX.X knots.
+ = ahead, - =astern
Sign as above.
+ = starboard, - = port.
This is the "default" menu, which is shown during normal operation. If left in any other menu,
the system will return to this menu after 2 minutes of idling.
5.2.2 Menu A, Alert list
When pressing the MENU button in the Main menu, A0 ALERT LIST is displayed.
A0 ALERT LIST
0 ACTIVE
This menu displays the number of active SAL speed log system alerts if any (PSALW)
including LPU2 alerts (400-499).
The menu will also display external alarms ($xxALR). Note! Echo Sounder alarms ($SDALR)
are NOT displayed.
Press the ENTER button for sub menu A1. Menu A1 contains a list of active alerts. Use the +, or MENU button to toggle between all active alerts/alarms if any.
For a list of LPU2 alert numbers, see Table 6 Alert list on page 42.
5.2.3 Menu I, Inputs
When pressing the MENU button in the Alert list MENU, I0 INPUTS is displayed.
I0 INPUTS
WRITE ACCESS OFF
Settings concerning NMEA- and OPTO- inputs are set under this menu.
NMEA talkers:
I1 NMEA IN1
LOG 1 MAIN
to
I9 NMEA IN9
ALARM MUTE
Which type of NMEA talkers that are connected to the LPU2 can be set in menu I1 to I9. These
settings control which type of NMEA messages that will be let through on each input. Menu I1
to I9 can also be set to correct and let through incoming NMEA with missing or corrupt
checksum. Each NMEA talker is filtered according to the filter-file in use, see 6 NMEA
filtering on page 38.
NOTE! Each of the four default input functions: LOG 1 MAIN, LOG 1 REDUNDANCY,
GYRO or ESD shall never be set to more than one NMEA input.
26 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
OPTO inputs:
I10 OPTO IN 1
ALARM MUTE
to
I13 OPTO IN 4
LOG 2 MAIN
The LPU2 is equipped with four opto-isolated inputs that can be used to control the system.
Each input can be set according to the following list:
OPTO inputs
ALARM MUTE
Mute an ESD Alarm
ES 2 MAIN
ES 2 (LOG 2) becomes the active Echo Sounder
LOG 2 MAIN
LOG 2 becomes the active log
LOG 1 BT MUTE
Mutes the BT / SOG transmitter of LOG 1
LOG 2 BT MUTE
Mutes the BT / SOG transmitter of LOG 2
Table 1 OPTO input list
5.2.4 Menu M, Miscellaneous

When pressing the MENU button in the I0 INPUTS menu, M0 MISC is displayed.
M0 MISC
WRITE ACCESS OFF
Example of settings:
- Restore to default menu settings
- CPU Reboot
- Display SoftWare REVISION
- Display FirmWare REVISION
- Display HardWare REVISION
- ACCESS LEVEL
See table Menu function summary For a complete MENU list.
5.2.5 Menu N, NMEA out
When pressing the MENU button in the M0 MISC menu, N0 NMEA OUT is displayed.
NO NMEA OUT
WRITE ACCESS OFF
Setting concerning NMEA outputs are set under this menu.

For example:
- NMEA listeners
- Transmit baud rate
NMEA listeners:
N1 NMEA OUT1
ESD
to
N8 NMEA O 16-23
SPEED+DEPTH
Which type of NMEA listeners that are connected to the LPU2 can be set in menu N1 to N8.
These settings control which NMEA messages are transmitted on each output. Each NMEA
output is filtered according to the filter-file in use, see 6 NMEA filtering on page 38.
27 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
5.2.6 Menu O, Outputs

When pressing the MENU button in the N0 NMEA OUT menu, O0 OUTPUTS is displayed.
O0 OUTPUTS
WRITE ACCESS OFF
Setting concerning analogue, relay and opto outputs are set under this menu.
Analogue outputs:
O1 ANALOG OUT 1
WTL
Longitudinal water speed

O1.01 ANA OUT 1
0.1 V/KNOTS
Scale factor for output 1

O2 ANALOG OUT 2
BTR
Resulting ground speed

O2.01 ANA OUT 2
0.1 V/KNOTS
Scale factor for output 2

Relay and OPTO outputs:
O3 RELAY K1
FAIL LOG 1 REDUN
to
O18 OPTO 8
PULSE F BTR 200P
Program a threshold value for relay and / or OPTO outputs:
Example to set OPTO out 1 to a threshold value of WTL higher than 8kn:
Use the MENU button to go to menu O11
O11 OPTO 1
PULSE A WTL 200P
Use the + button to go to the function WTL HIGH THAN 0

O11 OPTO 1
WTL HIGH THAN 0
Press the ENTER button

O11 OPTO 1
SAVING...
Press the ENTER button once more to reach sub menu O11.1
O11.1 OPTO 1
WTL HIGH THAN 0
Use the + button to set the value 8kn

O11.1 OPTO 1
WTL HIGH THAN 8
Press the ENTER button to save the value 8kn

Each relay and opto output can be programmed to indicate a specific function (see table
below).
Relay + opto out
Function
FAIL LOG 1 MAIN

FAIL LOG 2 MAIN
FAIL LOG 1 REDUN
ESD ALARM
No NMEA from LOG 1 main (power fail)

No NMEA from LOG 2 (power fail)
No NMEA from LOG 1 redundancy (power fail)
Alarm from Echo Sounder Display
28 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Relay + opto out
Function
PULSE A WTL 200P

PULSE B WTT 200P
PULSE C WTR 200P
PULSE D BTL 200P
PULSE E BTT 200P
PULSE F BTR 200P
WTL ASTERN
Pulse timer A (Default set to WTL 200P/NM) Menu S9

Pulse timer B (Default set to WTT 200P/NM) Menu S10
Pulse timer C (Default set to WTR 200P/NM) Menu S11
Pulse timer D (Default set to BTL 200P/NM) Menu S12
Pulse timer E (Default set to BTT 200P/NM) Menu S13
Pulse timer F (Default set to BTR 200P/NM) Menu S14
WTL Forward or Astern, Energized relay (Closed contact) =
Astern
WTT Port or Starboard, Energized relay (Closed contact) =
Port
De-energized relay (Open contact) = Invalid STW / WT
SOG longitudinal (BTL) Forward or Astern, Energized relay
(Closed contact) = Astern
SOG transverse (BTT) Port or Starboard, Energized relay
(Closed contact) = Port
De-energized relay (Open contact) = Invalid SOG
De-energized relay (Open contact) = Invalid BT DEPTH
XX is the longitudinal STW threshold value in knots
XX is the transversal STW threshold value in knots
XX is the resulting STW threshold value in knots
XX is the longitudinal SOG threshold value in knots
XX is the transversal SOG threshold value in knots
XX is the resulting SOG threshold value in knots
XX is the longitudinal STW threshold value in knots
XX is the transversal STW threshold value in knots
XX is the resulting STW threshold value in knots
XX is the longitudinal SOG threshold value in knots
XX is the transversal SOG threshold value in knots
XX is the resulting SOG threshold value in knots
WTT PORT
WT INVALID
BTL ASTERN
BTT PORT
BT INVALID
BT DEPTH INVALID
WTL HIGH.THAN XX
WTT HIGH.THAN XX
WTR HIGH.THAN XX
BTL HIGH.THAN XX
BTT HIGH.THAN XX
BTR HIGH.THAN XX
WTL LOW.THAN XX
WTT LOW.THAN XX
WTR LOW.THAN XX
BTL LOW.THAN XX
BTT LOW.THAN XX
BTR LOW.THAN XX
Table 2 Relay and OPTO out
29 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
5.2.7 Menu S, Settings

When pressing the MENU button in the O0 OUTPUTS menu, S0 SETTINGS is displayed.
S0 SETTINGS
WRITE ACCESS OFF
Setting concerning docking-log, NMEA syntax, NMEA delay, BT speed (SOG) input, pulse
timers, speed averaging, USB handling and network IP-address can be accessed under this
menu.
5.2.7.1 S1, System type

S1 SYSTEM TYPE
AUTO SENSE
The system can automatically detect connected SAL speed logs and set-up the system
accordingly. When the menu is set to AUTO SENSE it will make a new scan of the inputs and
choose a new system setup. The decision is made 5 seconds after the first valid NMEA input on
LOG1 Main, LOG1 Redundancy or LOG2. The chosen system type is displayed when the
menu S1 is entered again. Alternatively, this menu can be used to manually set the type of
system according to following table.
SYSTEM TYPE
Function
AUTO SENSE
T SERIES
R1a
DUAL LOG
STW and SOG speed from log 1 are supervised, In 5 and In 1

STW speed from log 1 is supervised, In 5
STW and SOG speed from log 1 and 2 are supervised, In 5,
In 1 and In 2
When the setting in menu S1 is made, manually or with the AUTO SENSE function and the
systems detects incoming NMEA on these 3 inputs and this NMEA traffic does not match
current setting in menu S1, the system will set the LED code 05 on the red 2 x LED digits on
the CPU-PCB.
5.2.7.2 S2 S5, Docking Log

S2 DL GYRO INPUT
NMEA
The rate of turn signal from the gyro can be fed to the LPU2, either via a serial NMEA
interface or an analogue DC voltage. If ANALOGUE is chosen, an additional menu S2.2 will
be used to set the scale factor of the analogue input.
S3 DL GEO BOW
0 M
Docking-log geometry, distance transducer to bow.

S4 DL GEO STERN
0 M
Docking-log geometry, distance transducer to stern.

Requirements for Docking log:
To calculate transversal speed of both ends of the ship the LPU2 needs settings and inputs
accordingly.
30 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
SOG speed input, longitudinal and transversal.

Rate-Of-Turn input, NMEA ($xxROT) or analogue, setting is made in menu S2.
Geometry of the ship referring to the transducer mounting. These settings are made in
menu S3 and S4. Both must be set to more than zero in order to activate the docking log
calculations.
When these three conditions are fulfilled the LPU2 starts to calculate docking log information
to be presented on e.g. SAL docking log display SD4-5.
The LPU2 will not calculate docking-log information if the menu S1 is set to R1a.
S5 DL NMEA
VDVBW
Specifies in which format the docking-log information is transmitted over the serial NMEA
interface. Can be set to VDVBW, PSALL or PSALL/VBW STERN
VDVBW: This is the standard Velocity Doppler log format, which includes two fields for
transversal speed. The first field shows transversal speed in the bow and the second field shows
transversal speed in the stern of the ship. If no docking-log calculation takes place, only the
first transversal field is used, indicating transversal transducer speed.
PSALL: This is a propriety message containing the docking-log information. The VDVBW
message is transmitted simultaneously, with only the first transversal field used indicating
transducer speed.
PSALL/VBW STER: The PSALL message and the VDVBW message are both transmitted.
The PSALL message containing the docking-log information, and the VDVBW message, using
the first transversal field for transducer speed and the second transversal field for speed in the
stern.
5.2.7.3 S6, VBW format

S6 VBW FORMAT
EXTENDED
IEC 61162-1 edition 2 adds docking-log information fields to the VDVBW message for stern
transversal speed. Some older listeners might not support those new fields in the message.
Setting this menu to SHORT, forces the LPU2 to output the VDVBW message in the shorter
format without stern transversal speed.
Note if SHORT version of the VDVBW message is used menu S5 must be set to PSALL for
the docking-log info to be transmitted to the listeners, e.g. SD4-5.
5.2.7.4 S7, TX delay

S7 TX DELAY
0 MS
This menu controls the interval between serial data messages. The delay can be used to lower
data rate for slow receiver devices unable to handle messages back to back. The value is
adjustable in 10 ms steps from 0 up to 60-70 ms (default delay is 0 ms). For maximum
31 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
throughput the value shall be set as low as possible. When using the MFD5 we recommend
setting this value to 60-70ms.
5.2.7.5 S8, BT Speed Inp

S8 BT SPEED INP
LOG
Currently not implemented, but will extend the use of the LPU2 to also calculate docking-log
information from other speed sources.
5.2.7.6 S9 S14, Pulses

S9 PULSE A
WTL 200 P / NM
to
S14 PULSE F
BTR 200 P / NM
There are 6 different pulse timers (A-F) used to generate speed pulses that can be chosen for
relay and opto outputs. Following listed speeds can be set under Menu S9 S14.
Pulse timer settings Function
WTL 100P
Longitudinal STW 100 pulses / NM
WTL 200P
Longitudinal STW 200 pulses / NM (Default for Pulse timer A)
WTL 400P
WTL 500P
WTT 100P
Transversal STW 100 pulses / NM
WTT 200P
Transversal STW 200 pulses / NM (Default for Pulse timer B)
WTT 400P
WTT 500P
WTR 100P
Resulting STW 100 pulses / NM
WTR 200P
Resulting STW 200 pulses / NM (Default for Pulse timer C)
WTR 400P
WTR 500P
BTL 100P
Longitudinal SOG 100 pulses / NM
BTL 200P
Longitudinal SOG 200 pulses / NM (Default for Pulse timer D)
BTL 400P
BTL 500P
BTT 100P
Transversal SOG 100 pulses / NM
BTT 200P
Transversal SOG 200 pulses / NM (Default for Pulse timer E)
BTT 400P
BTT 500P
BTR 100P
Resulting SOG 100 pulses / NM
BTR 200P
Resulting SOG 200 pulses / NM (Default for Pulse timer F)
BTR 400P
BTR 500P
Table 3 Pulse timer settings
5.2.7.7 S15, SPD Average

32 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
S15 SPD AVERAGE

0 SEC
This menu will affect analogue and pulse outputs as well as those NMEA outputs programmed
for NMEA listeners SPD AVERAGE +DPT. Rapid changes of speed will be slowed down
by the set value in this menu. If, for example, this menu is set to 5 sec, it will take 5 seconds for
a speed change to be fully indicated on the output. When choosing this setting on an NMEA
output, speed is filtered according to the time setting but transmitted DPT is unchanged
5.2.7.8 S16, USB storage

S16 USB STORAGE
FILL UP
An USB memory stick can be used to store all received and transmitted NMEA messages in the
LPU2. This menu enables activation or deactivation of the NMEA storage. Please reboot the
LPU2 before inserting USB memory stick. Average storage on USB memory stick is approx.
300 MB/24h. Menu can be set to FILL UP or OFF.
5.2.7.9 S17, USB Erase
S17 USB ERASE
DISABLED
This menu gives the possibility to completely erase and format an USB memory. However, it
might fail depending on LPU2 load and the type of USB memory.
5.2.7.10 S18 S19, IP-Addresses

S18 LPU2 ADDRESS
IP 192.168.5.17
Specifies which IP address the LPU2 will respond to when accessed from a service tool. Last
digit is default set to 17 and should normally not be changed. As authorized it may be set
from 1 to 50. If set outside this range, it will use 1 or 50.
S19 SERVICE PC
IP 192.168.5.56
Specifies which IP address the LPU2 shall connect to when accessing a service tool.
Not changeable.
5.2.8 Menu T, Test
When pressing the MENU button in the S0 SETTINGS menu, T0 TEST is displayed.
T0 TEST
WRITE ACCESS OFF
Incoming NMEA can be simulated using the menu T1.

If the setting in menu S1 is T-SERIES, the LPU2 simulates incoming NMEA as below:
T1 TEST NMEA
T-SERIES
NMEA input signals are simulated internally by the LPU2 with the following setting:
Log1Main:
WTL = 20.10, BTL = 21.10, BTT = 1.10, Depth = 99.1
Log1Redundancy: WTL = 24.50, BTL = 25.50, BTT = 1.50, Depth = 99.5
GYRO_ROT:
ROT = 5.30
33 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
NOTE echo sounder depth is not simulated, $SDDPT, only speed log depth $VDDPT.
If the setting in menu S1 is R1A, the LPU2 simulates incoming NMEA as below:
T1 TEST NMEA
R1A
NMEA input signals are simulated internally in the LPU2 with the following setting:
Log1Redundancy: WTL = 24.50
If the setting in menu S1 is DUAL_LOG, the LPU2 simulates incoming NMEA as below:
T1 TEST NMEA
DUAL LOG
NMEA input signals are simulated internally in the LPU2 with the following setting:
Log1Main:
WTL = 20.10, BTL = 21.10, BTT = 1.10, Depth = 99.1
Log1Redundancy: WTL = 24.50, BTL = 25.50, BTT = 1.50, Depth = 99.5
Log2Main:
WTL = 22.20, BTL = 23.20, BTT = 1.20, Depth = 99.2
GYRO_ROT:
ROT = 5.30
If the setting in menu S1 is AUTO SENSE this information is shown:
T1 TEST NMEA
CAN NOT SIMULATE AUTO
Please set menu S1 before simulate NMEA.
5.3 Menu system via Web interface

The Ethernet connection (RJ45) is located in upper right corner of the CPU PCB. When using
this connection the built in web interface is accessible. The LPU2 will act like a DHCP server
and assign the IP address 192.168.5.56 for a connected PC. Web browsers supported are:
Windows Internet Explorer from 7.0 or Modzilla Firefox from 3.0.
NOTE! A crossover network cable has to be used. If the PC has auto-crossover it is possible to
use a straight network cable.
Connect the network cable to the PC and to the LPU2

Wait a few minutes until the PC and LPU2 has established a connection
Start the web browser
Type 192.168.5.17 in the browsers address field and press enter. This is the default IP
address of the LPU2.
The LPU2 web interface appears where all settings can be made. For further assistance see
separate annex on page 47.
34 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
5.4 Menu function summary

No
Name
MAIN
MENU
A0
W+XX.XX DXXX.X
BL+XX.X T+X.XX
ALERT LIST
A1
ACTIVE ALERTS
INPUTS
NMEA IN1
NMEA IN1
NMEA IN1
LOG 1 MAIN
CHECKSUMTEST ON
BAUDRATE 4800
I3.01
I3.02
NMEA
NMEA
NMEA
NMEA
NMEA
NMEA
IN2
IN2
IN2
IN3
IN3
IN3
LOG 2 MAIN
CHECKSUMTEST ON
BAUDRATE 4800
GYRO (ROT)
CHECKSUMTEST ON
BAUDRATE 4800
I4.01
I4.02
NMEA IN4
NMEA IN4
NMEA IN4
ESD
CHECKSUMTEST ON
BAUDRATE 4800
NMEA IN5
NMEA IN5
NMEA IN6
LOG 1 REDUNDANCY
CHECKSUMTEST ON
SD4
NMEA IN6
NMEA IN7
NMEA IN7
NMEA IN8
NMEA IN8
NMEA IN9
NMEA IN9
OPTO IN 1
OPTO IN 2
OPTO IN 3
OPTO IN 4
ANALOG IN
MISCELLANEOUS
MENU DEFAULTS
MENU FROM USB
MENU TO USB
CONF DEFAULTS
CONF FROM USB
CONF TO USB
CHECKSUMTEST ON
SD4
CHECKSUMTEST ON
GPS
CHECKSUMTEST ON
ALARM MUTE
CHECKSUMTEST ON
ALARM MUTE
LOG 1 BT MUTE
ES 2 MAIN
LOG 2 MAIN
GYRO (ROT)
I0
I1
I1.01
I1.02
I2
I2.01
I2.02
I3
I4
I5
I5.01
I6
I6.01
I7
I7.01
I8
I8.01
I9
I9.01
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
Default setting
Function
Displays the number

active alerts and alarms.
List of active alerts
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
35 (52)
*
OFF or ON
*
4800 or 38400
*
OFF or ON
4800 or 38400
*
OFF or ON
4800 or 38400
*
*
OFF or ON
*
4800 or 38400
*
*
OFF or ON
*
Speed Log Master
Display
*
OFF or ON
*
OFF or ON
Diagnostic function
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
Mutes the SOG function
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
No
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
N0
N1
N1.01
Name
USB UPDATES
BACKUP TO USB
CPU REBOOT
SW REVISION
FW REVISION
HW REVISION
ACCESS LEVEL
NMEA OUT
NMEA OUT 1
NMEA O 1
Default setting
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
704519xx
704517xx
704510xx
ALL USER
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
O0
O1
O1.01
O2
O2.01
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
O10
O11
O12
O13
O14
O15
O16
O17
O18
S0
S1
NMEA OUT 2
NMEA OUT 3-6
NMEA OUT 7
NMEA OUT 8
NMEA OUT 9
NMEA OUT 10-15
NMEA OUT 16-23
OUTPUTS
ANALOG OUT 1
ANALOG OUT 1
ANALOG OUT 2
ANALOG OUT 2
RELAY K1
RELAY K2
RELAY K3
RELAY K4
RELAY K5
RELAY K6
RELAY K7
RELAY K8
OPTO 1
OPTO 2
OPTO 3
OPTO 4
OPTO 5
OPTO 6
OPTO 7
OPTO 8
SETTINGS
SYSTEM TYPE
SD4 MASTER
SPEED+DEPTH
LOG 1
LOG 2
SD4 MASTER
SD4
SPEED+DEPTH
DL GYRO INPUT
DL GYRO INPUT
DL AIN SCALE
NMEA
ANA +180/MIN=10V
+180/MIN = +10V
S2
S2
S2.01
Function
*
*
xx = actual revision
ESD
BAUDRATE 4800
WTL
0.1 V/KNOTS
BTR
0.1 V/KNOTS
Fail Log 1
Fail Log 1
WTL ASTERN
ESD ALARM
PULSE A WTL
PULSE A WTL
PULSE F BTR
PULSE F BTR
PULSE A WTL
PULSE A WTL
PULSE A WTL
PULSE A WTL
PULSE F BTR
PULSE F BTR
PULSE F BTR
PULSE F BTR
WTL, BTL, BTR

0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
WTL, BTL or BTR
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
Main NMEA fail
*
Redundant NMEA fail *
200P
200P
200P
200P
200P
200P
200P
200P
200P
200P
200P
200P
AUTO SENSE
36 (52)
*
4800 or 38400
*
*
AUTO SENSE, TSERIES, R1a or DUAL

LOG
(NMEA or ANA)
Not visible when S2 is
set to NMEA
Consilium
No
S3
LPU2
Name
DL GEO BOW
Default setting
0 M
S4
DL GEO STERN
0 M
S5
DL NMEA
VDVBW
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
VDVBW FORMAT
TX DELAY
BT SPEED INP
PULSE A
PULSE B
PULSE C
PULSE D
PULSE E
PULSE F
SPD AVERAGE
USB STORAGE
USB ERASE
LPU2 ADDRESS
SERVICE PC
TEST
TEST NMEA
EXTENDED
0 MS
LOG
WTL 200 P / NM
WTT 200 P / NM
WTR 200 P / NM
BTL 200 P / NM
BTT 200 P / NM
BTR 200 P / NM
0 SEC
FILL UP
DISABLED
IP 192.168.5.17
IP 192.168.5.56
WRITE ACCESS OFF
T-SERIES
T0
T1
Art No. 704531B8
Function
Distance from transducer
1 to the bow of the ship
[0-999m]
Distance from transducer
1 to the stern of the ship
[0-999m]
VDVBW, PSALL or
PSALL/VBW STERN *
SHORT/EXTENDED *
0-63ms (6bits)
*
(For future use)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0 to 255s
*
FILL_UP or OFF
Formats and erase
17 can be set from 1-50 *
192.168.5 56 is fixed *
T-SERIES, R1a or
DUAL-LOG
Note!
*) Not changeable.
Grey fields indicates not visible menus.
These settings shall never be changed and are only changeable when M13 is changed and
only for development purposes.
37 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
6 NMEA filtering
Inputs are filtered according to a filter-file. The table below describes input filtering when
filter-file NMEAfilterT_rev.txt is in use. The question mark ? is used as a wildcard and
can be replaced by any character.
NMEA talkers
Not filtered messages are starting with:
LOG 1 MAIN
VD; PSAL
LOG 1 REDUNDANCY VD; PSALS; PSALD; PSALW
LOG 2
VD; PSAL;
GYRO (ROT)
??ROT
ES
SDDPT
ESD
SD; VDTXT; PSALC
SD4
PSALS,0; PSALS,1; PSALS,2; PSALS,3; PSALS,4;
PSALR; PSALC; VDTXT; ??ACK
ALARM MUTE
??ACK
GPS
G??
GYRO (HDT)
??HDT
GYRO (ROT+HDT)
??HDT; ??ROT
OTHER
Not yet implemented
Table 4 NMEA talker list
This table is stored in a filter-file that is specific for the system type chosen in menu S1.
The filter-files also contain NMEA output filtering according to NMEA listners table below.
There are totally three default filter-files in the LPU2 application: NMEAfilterT_rev.txt,
NMEAfilterR1a_rev.txt and NMEAfilterDual_rev.txt. Example: a T-series system
will use the file NMEAfilterT_rev.txt.
Note! The filter-files shall never be changed and are only changeable when M13 is changed
and only for development purposes.
The filter-file type in use can be imported / exported to an USB memory stick. Using the menu
M6 CONF TO USB the LPU2 will create a folder on the USB memory stick named
LPU2store_restore and export (copy) the filter-file in use from the LPU2 into the
LPU2store_restore folder on the USB memory stick.
A filter-file can be imported into the LPU2 using menu M5 CONF. FROM USB. The USB
memory stick has to have a folder named LPU2store_restore on the root where the filterfile is placed.
38 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
The NMEA messages are routed according to the following default NMEA talkers list if the
NMEAfilterT_rev.txt filter-file is in use. (? Is used as a wildcard and can be replaced by
any character)
NMEA listeners
Transmitted messages are starting with
SPEED + DEPTH
VDVBW; VDVLW; ##DPT; ??ALR; PSALL
SPD AVERAGE +DPT @@VBW; VDVLW; ##DPT; ??ALR; @@ALL
SD4 DUAL LOG
VDVBW; PSALS,5; PSALS,6; PSALS,9; PSALc; PSALR,,;
PSALU,1
SD4 MASTER
VDVBW; VDVLW; ??DPT; VDALR; PSALS,5; PSALS,6;
PSALS,9; ??ROT; PSALL; PSALR,,, PSALW
SD4
VDVBW; VDVLW; ##DPT; ??ROT; PSALL; PSALR
LOG 1
PSALS,0; PSALS,1,; PSALS,1?,; PSALS,10; PSALC; VDACK
LOG 2
PSALS,0; PSALS,1,; PSALS,1?,; PSALS,10; PSALC; VDACK
ESD
VDDPT; SDACK; PSALX; VDVBW; PSALW
VDR
VDVBW; VDVLW; ##DPT; ??ALR; PSALc;
MFD
VD; ??ROT; PSALL
GPS
G??
OTHER
Not yet implemented
Table 5 NMEA listeners
##DPT:
VDDPT if no valid SDDPT for 10 sec
@@VBW; @@ALL:
Averaged speed according to time constant in menu S15
This table is also stored in the filter-file described above.
39 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
7 Testing Procedure
Connected equipment may be tested in two ways:
1) using ordinary input from the SAL Log ELC and the ROT gyro (optional). Either during
normal operation or using internal test modes to produce a known SAL Log ELC output. For
setting these test modes, please consult the operating/installation manuals for the SAL speed
log and ROT gyro.
2) using simulated NMEA input, self-generated by the LPU2. For setting these modes, please
see Menu T. Only equipment connected to the output can be tested.
40 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
8 Service and maintenance

The red 2 x LED digits, (14 red LEDs positioned as two 7-segment) on the LPU2 PCB are
used to display status. At normal operation the LED digits displays LED code: 00.
8.1 Supervision and alert numbers

The LPU2 supervises functions according to the table below. Alert numbers 400 499 are
reserved for the LPU2. Active alerts are presented in Menu A, accessible both from the Speed
Log Master Display and the LPU2 Web interface. The last hundred alerts are saved in a history
list only accessible from the Web interface.
The LED code (the two last digits of the alert code) will be displayed on the red 2 x LED digits
on the CPU-PCB. If more than one alert is active, only the highest LED code (highest priority)
will be displayed. All active alerts with alert number 400-499 and external standard $xxALR
messages are accessible via Menu A and Web interface.
Note! $SDALR messages from Echo Sounder Display are not supervised.
The following table lists all internal alerts detectable by the LPU2:
LED
code
00
05
Alert
Text
Description
400
405
07
407
08
408
09
409
10
410
31
32
33
431
432
433
34
35
36
37
434
435
436
437
38
438
40
440
4X
44X
NORMAL OPERATION
SYSTEM MISMATCH
NMEA input mismatch. Check System Type
(Menu S1)
POWER FAIL SOG 1
NMEA from SOG log 1 missing.
Check IN1 / System Type
POWER FAIL STW 1
NMEA from STW log 1 missing.
Check IN5 (always supervised)
POWER FAIL LOG 2
NMEA from speed log 2 missing.
Check IN2 / System Type
ROT MISSING
NMEA from Gyro missing
(Docking: Menu S3 and S4 > 0)
OVERFLOW OUT 1
NMEA overflow on Out_1, terminal 36 (channel 0)
OVERFLOW OUT 2
OVERFLOW OUT 3-6
NMEA overflow on Out_3-6, terminal 38-41
(channel 2)
OVERFLOW OUT 7
OVERFLOW OUT 8
OVERFLOW OUT 9
OVERFLOW O 10-15
NMEA overflow on Out_10-15,
terminal 45-46, 59-62 (channel 6)
OVERFLOW O 16-23
NMEA overflow on Out_16-23,
terminal 63-70 (channel 7)
NMEA OVERFLOW
NMEA inputs overflow. Too high total serial data
load
CORRUPT / BAUD IN
NMEA corrupt or wrong baud rate IN_X
X
(X = Input 1..9)
41 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
LED
code
5X
Alert
Text
Description
45X
POL/ BAUD IN X
6X
71
46X
471
CHECKSUM ERR IN X
HW ERR OUT 1
72
472
HW ERR OUT 2
73
473
HW ERR OUT 3-6
74
474
HW ERR OUT 7
75
475
HW ERR OUT 8
76
476
HW ERR OUT 9
77
477
HW ERR OUT 10-15
78
478
HW ERR OUT 16-23
84
88
484
488
LPU EEPROM ERROR

LPU SIMULATION
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
FUSE F304 47-49

FUSE F301 50-52
FUSE F302 53-55
FUSE F303 56-58
POWER FAIL +6V
POWER FAIL -6V
POWER FAIL +5V_1
POWER FAIL +5V_2
POWER FAIL +5V_3
POWER FAIL +5V_4
POWER FAIL +5V
REDUNDANCY MODE
NMEA polarity or baud rate error In_X (X = Input

1..9)
Checksum error on NMEA In_X (X = Input 1..9)
Hardware error, NMEA Out_1, terminal 36
(channel 0)
(channel 1)
Hardware error, NMEA Out_3-6, terminal 38-41
(channel 2)
(channel 3)
(channel 4)
(channel 5)
Hardware error, NMEA Out_10-15,
terminal 45-46, 59-62 (channel 6)
Hardware error, NMEA Out_16-23,
terminal 63-70 (channel 7)
EEPROM read failure (Default parameters are used)
Simulated speed and depth
(LPU Menu T)
Fault fuse F304 / green LED, terminal 47-49
Internal power fail +6V / green LED CPU Board
Internal power fail -6V / green LED CPU Board
Internal power fail +5V_1 / green LED CPU Board
Internal power fail +5V / green LED CPU Board
NMEA routed via redundancy relays
E0
Table 6 Alert list
The actual revision of the loaded software can be checked in the LPU2 Menu System M10 and
M11.
42 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
8.2 Service modes and DIP switches

A set of 8 DIP switches are located on the CPU-board close to the upper right corner.
DIP switches 1-6 shall always be set to: DIP 1 and 5 = ON and DIP 2, 3, 4, and 6 = OFF.
Note! DIP position Down = ON.
DIP 7 and 8 controls in which mode that is selected when rebooting the LPU2.
Four different modes can be selected:
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OFF
Mode 0: Normal operation
ON
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OFF
Mode 1: Software update from USB
ON
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OFF
Mode 2: Factory reset
ON
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OFF
Mode 3: Service and factory test
ON
The mode is selected by first setting DIP switch 7 and 8 as follows and then press and release
the Reboot button on the CPU-board.
During the first seconds after a reboot both S1 and S2 are off, before the start-up procedure
enters the selected boot mode. Then each mode is indicated by the two red LEDs S1 and S2 on
the CPU board.
During normal operation, Mode 0, LED S1, S3 and S4 are lit and LED S2 flickers.
8.3 Performing updating sequence

MODE 0: Regular software update
Regular software updates are performed using the flashing utility software WinFlash, 706080.
DIP switches shall be in default setting, i.e. DIP 7 and 8 Mode 0. The image file for LPU2 is
named 704580Rr.lpu, where Rr is the revision number. When performing this update,
connect a serial cable to the service RS232 D-sub located in the upper left corner of the LPU2
and to a PC. Menu settings will not be overwritten when updating the software using Winflash.
Press and release the Reboot button on the CPU-board and within a few seconds click Start
in WinFlash. If not succeeded try once more.
43 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
MODE 1: USB software update
The LPU2 may be updated with smaller modifications from an USB memory stick. The
following softwares are supported for updates from USB:
704517, LPU2 PCB Firmware
704519, LPU2 PCB Software
First, prepare a USB memory stick by placing the software update(s) in a directory called
LPU2updates at the top directory level. It is important to use capital letters for LPU and
small letters for updates. Then, place the USB stick in either one of the two USB
connections.
Set DIP to Mode 1, DIP switch 8=off and 7=on. Press and release the Reboot button and the
following process begin:
1: LED S1 and S2 = OFF (a few seconds)
2: LED S1 = ON and LED S2 = OFF
3: As a safety procedure, all previous files in the update directory on the LPU2 are
backed up to the USB stick top level directory LPU2backup.
4: The updates are copied from the USB stick. All files in the LPU2updates directory
on the USB stick are copied to the lpu2.
5: To indicate that the update procedure is finished, LED S1 goes OFF.
LED S1 and S2 also indicate if something went wrong, by flashing repeatedly. Please check
USB stick and try again. Information about the installation progress is shown in a hyper
terminal if connected to the service RS232 D-sub (115k 8N1).
When the software update procedure is finished, take out the USB Memory stick and set the
DIP switch back to normal operation, Mode 0, and press and release the Reboot button.
MODE 0: Normal operation
Set dipswitch 8=off and 7=off. Press and release the Reboot button and the following process
begin:
1: S1 = off and S2 = off
2: Executes software upgrade if available, otherwise default software is executed.
3: S1, S2, S3 and S4 are now under the LPU2 software control. S1, S3 and S4 are lit, S2
flickers.
8.4 Performing factory reset

WARNING: A factory reset will erase all menu settings and configuration normally done
during commissioning. If a software update from USB is interrupted by e.g. a power failure, a
factory reset will be necessary.
MODE 2: factory reset
44 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Set dipswitch to Mode 2 (from default move DIP 8=ON). Press and release the Reboot button
and the following process begin:
1: LED S2 = OFF (only a few seconds)
2: LED S2 = ON
3: Previous updates will be erased
4: The EPROM will be reset with the factory default menu settings and config.
5: To indicate that the factory reset procedure is finished, LED S2 goes OFF.
The factory reset takes totally about 1 minute and 30 seconds.
The LEDs (S1 and S2) may also indicate if something went wrong, by flashing repeatedly.
Press the Reboot button to try once more. Information about the factory-reset progress is sent to
a Hyper Terminal if connected to the service RS232 D-sub (115k 8N1).
When factory reset is finished, set the DIP switch back to Mode 0 (back to default, move DIP
8=off), normal operation and press and release the Reboot button. After about 45 seconds the
system is up and running.
8.5 USB
Either one of the two USB connections can be used, but not simultaneously.
8.5.1 USB memory stick requirements
o The USB memory stick must be formatted with a file system of type FAT32.
Menu S17 can be used to erase and format an inserted USB memory sticks. However, it might
fail depending on LPU2 load and the type of USB memory. If Menu S17 fails, us a PC to
format the USB memory to FAT 32.
o
8.5.2 Recording NMEA to a USB memory stick
It is possible to store all incoming and outgoing NMEA messages to a USB Memory stick. This
enables long time monitoring of system functionality. The USB memory stick can later be sent
for analysis. All incoming and outgoing NMEA messages are stored in a folder named
LPU2recordings on the USB memory stick.
1: Insert an empty USB memory stick.
2: Reboot the LPU2 using the Reboot button or menu M9.
3: Start the NMEA recording by enabling menu S16. This menu is by default enabled.
If already enabled, the recording will start by itself. The USB memory stick is updated once
every minute. The recording will not overwrite any data when USB memory stick is full.
8.6 Troubleshooting
The LPU2 is equipped with several functions for easy troubleshooting.
Fuses
3 pcs 5x20mm 2,5A SB (F101 230V, F102 115V, F103 Common, N)
located at the PSU board. These fuses power the LPU2.
4 pcs 5x20mm 1,6A SB supplying DC out, located at the IO board.
Each of these fuses supplies 3 terminals, i.e. the upper fuse supply terminals 4745 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
49, the second fuse supply terminals 50-52 etc. Each fuse has a green control
LED to the right of the fuse. At normal operation these four LEDs shall be lit.
Green LEDs
8 green LEDs for internal voltage supervision are located at the upper edge of
the CPU board. In normal operation these 8 LEDs shall be lit.
4 red LEDs
4 red LEDs are controlled by the software, LED S1, S2, S3 and S4.
In normal operation, S1, S3 and S4 are lit, S2 flickers.
Red 2 x LED digits
Red 2 x LED digits display for alert status. Code 00 shall be displayed during
normal operation, see 8.1 Supervision and alert numbers.
DIP 1-8
A set of 8 DIP switches are located on the CPU-board close to the upper right
corner. In normal operation these DIPs shall be set to: 1 and 5 = ON, the rest =
OFF. Note! ON = down.
NMEA inputs
Each NMEA input is supervised by a control LED. Whenever NMEA telegrams
are received the corresponding LED shall flicker.
NMEA outputs
Each NMEA output is supervised by a control LED. Whenever NMEA
telegrams are transmitted the corresponding LED shall flicker.
Opto and relay terminals
Each Opto and relay terminal is supervised by a control LED that is turned on
when the output is active.
Web interface
The built-in Web interface has several functions for trouble shooting such as an
NMEA display function where all incoming and outgoing NMEA traffic can be
watched. The Web interface can read the alert history file where all alerts are
time stamped.
USB interface
USB connection can be used to save incoming/outgoing NMEA traffic on a USB
memory stick. Saved data on the stick can be analyzed by Consilium for service
purpose.
46 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Annex 1
9 Web-interface
The built-in web-interface can be used to setup the LPU2s menu system and for different
service purposes such as display incoming/outgoing NMEA, list time stamped alerts. Below
follows some examples from the web-interface.
9.1 Start window

1. In the start window the revisions of the application software, firmware and hardware
(CPU Pcb) are shown.
2. Menu field, use this field to go to the different windows for settings and supervision.
3. Status field, displays if the LPU2 has acknowledged a command, e.g. Save OK.
9.2 Menu A window

1. This window will display active alerts. Each alert will be time stamped according to the
LPU2 internal system clock. The Display History button will show the last 100 alerts. It
is normal to have 100 alerts in the history, caused by power shutdowns or service on
connected equipment. However, important internal and external failures can be found.
47 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
2. The LPU2 internal system clock. The time stamps are relative this clock. The clock is
set from factory and is not related to, e.g., the GPS time. The time can not be set in SW
704519B0 or earlier.
2
1
48 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
9.3 Display NMEA pop-up window

The Display NMEA window displays incoming and outgoing NMEA.
Cannot route means that the LPU2 is not setup for this message on this port.
*******NMEA Buffer full****** indicates a time gap in the list, i.e., there has been
messages since the last message above, that will not be shown.
49 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
Annex 2
10 Wiring principles
Cable Dimensions and Standards
Make sure that the all cables are approved for marine environment usage.
Signal Cables
All cables used for signal interconnection of the SAL Speed-log system units shall
have a cross section of at least 0.5 mm2 with a voltage rating of at least 60 volts and be
screened, either an aluminium foil screen with an inlaid, blank, stranded conductor, or
tinned copper braid should be used.
If the specifications state twisted pair, such cable should be used.
It is recommended to use a cable with numbered conductors. This makes identification much
easier, and minimizes the risk of miss-connections.
DC Power Cables
All cables specified to be DC power cables in the Speed-log system shall have a cross
section of at least 1.5 mm2 with a voltage rating of at least 120 volts. Using any other
cable type will void warranty.
The installation directions may specify a heavier cross section.
It is recommended to increase the cross section at longer runs of cable (e.g. exceeding 10
meter) to avoid problems with voltage drops.
It is also recommended to use cable with coloured conductors, preferable one red part for the
positive voltage and one black part for negative return.
AC Power Cable
All cables used for supplying AC power in the Speed-log system shall have a cross
section of at least 1.5 mm2 with a voltage rating of at least 500 volts.
The cable must be UL registered, for the environment in which it is used. Failing to use
UL registered cable will void warranty.
The cable must have three conductors, coloured blue, brown and yellow-green. The
yellow-green part is to be used for grounding only.
Follow established electrical safety regulations when selecting and using high voltage cabling.
Comments to signal cabling
Noise
All cables with two or more parts are twisted (stranded) for manufacturing reasons. This does
not mean any two-conductor cable is a Twisted Pair.
Twisted pair means two separated and isolated wires, twisted together in a special
noise-cancelling configuration.
Two twisted pairs means two separate sets of such two wires, twisted together, not
four wires twisted together.
The twisted pair is a unit that by its twist protects itself from the environment, and protects the
environment (such as, the pair next to it) from itself. The pitch of the twist is carefully
calculated to maximize the noise-cancelling properties, which is not the case with ordinary
50 (52)
Consilium
LPU2
Art No. 704531B8
multi-pole cable. Thus, when using Two twisted pairs make sure using the two wires twisted
together and not one wire from each twisted pair.
Do not use twisted quads or ordinary multi-pole cable, which also has somewhat twisted parts.
In a twisted quad the signals in one pair will cross-couple to the other pair, because they are so
close, and because one pair has no means of protecting itself from the other pair. In an ordinary
multi-pole cable, the noise-cancelling properties are random or unknown i.e. cross-coupling
between the individual wires is bound to occur.
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is everywhere. It is the unwanted signal component that
disrupts a system, creates unwanted noise in the audio channels, or causes the system to go
down at irregular intervals. If EMI is not counter-acted at installation time, it will be very
costly to troubleshoot and change the system later. Intermittent faults with an EMI background
can be impossible to find.
The Speed-log units has been designed and tested with EMI protection in mind, but defective
wiring may destroy that protection.
Termination of Signal Cables
To reduce the risk of
EMI induction
Excessive noise on audio channels
Short circuits
Intermittent faults
Entanglement
Mix-ups
and to ease re-dressing of cabling and re-connections after service
All signal cables must be connected carefully and by using described method depending
on type of connection block terminal.
1. Where the connection block terminals are of press-type we recommend to use bare
wires
2. Where the connection block terminals are of screw-type we recommend to press
end-caps on the bare wire ends as described below
Same principles can be used on power cables.
The free ends should be as short as possible. This tends to make connecting more difficult, but
greatly reduces the risk of EMI induction.
The end caps must be crimped with the proper tool to attain a proper connection. Never use
pliers or crimp-tools intended for anything else than end caps.
51 (52)
Intentionally blank
Consilium
Technical
Description
Serial Display
SAL SD4
Article No. 704005
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
Contents
1.
2.
3.
Background ....................................................................................... 4
Definitions and abbreviations ............................................................ 4
Design, general ................................................................................. 5
4.
Function, general .............................................................................. 5
5.
Function, SD4 versions ..................................................................... 8
6.
Set-up of SD4.................................................................................. 13
7.
8.
9.
Serial Data message definitions ...................................................... 20

Technical data................................................................................. 20
Installation and testing .................................................................... 21
10.
Speed Log Master Display .............................................................. 23
11.
12.
13.
14.
Alert messages ............................................................................... 25

Standby STW .................................................................................. 27
Suspend of remote equipment ........................................................ 28
Accessories..................................................................................... 29
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.
4.8.
4.9.
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
Display windows............................................................................................... 5
Direction arrows, status indications and backlight ........................................... 5
Pushbuttons ..................................................................................................... 5
MODE WINDOW ............................................................................................. 5

Distance and trip counters ............................................................................... 6
Lamp test ......................................................................................................... 6
Illumination of pushbuttons .............................................................................. 6
Invalid/unavailable information......................................................................... 7
Incorrect/missing NMEA messages ................................................................. 7
External DIM .................................................................................................... 7
Remote DIM message ..................................................................................... 7
200 p/NM speed output pulses ........................................................................ 7
SD4-1, U/N 704041, One axis STW and SOG ................................................ 8

SD4-2, U/N 704042, Two axis STW and SOG ................................................ 9
SD4-3, U/N 704043, One axis STW .............................................................. 10
SD4-4, U/N 704044, General Display ............................................................ 11
SD4-5, U/N 704045, Docking log Display ...................................................... 12
Entering the MENU system............................................................................ 13
Menu navigation............................................................................................. 13
REMOTE DIM set-up ..................................................................................... 15
External output/inputs .................................................................................... 16
Menu function summary................................................................................. 17
Mounting ........................................................................................................ 21
Downloading of new software ........................................................................ 22
Testing ........................................................................................................... 22
10.1.
10.2.
10.3.
10.4.
General .......................................................................................................... 23
Positioning of the Speed Log Master Display ................................................ 23
Electrical connection ...................................................................................... 23
Positioning of the labels ................................................................................. 24
14.1.
AC power supply, SDP 701219...................................................................... 30

2 (35)
Consilium
14.2.
14.3.
14.4.
14.5.
14.6.
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
Bulkhead mounting box, SD4 BMB 704080................................................... 31

Stand Alone mounting box, SD4SA 704090 .................................................. 32
SD4EB Extension board 704110 ................................................................... 33
SD4ED External Dimmer 704120 .................................................................. 34
SD4 SDR2 Remote control 704130 ............................................................... 35
Revisions
2005-01-24
2005-04-12
A0
A1
2005-04-12
2005-10-12
A2
A3
2005-12-09
A4
2008-09-23
A5
2009-09-02
A6
2010-01-19
B0
2011-01-13
B1
RB
RB
Created
Timeout from menu system 3min, IP66, Menu R0 changed,
editorial changes, SD4-BMB drawing, testing
RB Added U/N, more accessories, wider panel cut-out
RB Valid from sw rev A3. Added Master Display info, clarified
200p/NM pulse output, added REMOTE DIM [EXT]
description, reduced maximum current consumption, compass
safe distance.
RB SD4SDR2 connections updated, SD4-5 bow/stern, Default
settings SD4-4, Dimmer switch corrected.
RB Alert Mode, Depth offset, Suspend function, Dual log added.
Valid from SW revision 704021B2 and 704024B1.
AF VLW sync at resulting distance, menu LPc. Default setting in
Menu function summary. No TOTAL BTL,BTT,WTL,WTT.
Added STANDBY STW mode. WT->STW, BT->SOG, added
IMO standard at chapter 2. Alert mode no label, service
warning only. Alert info and improved explanations of modes
in table 6.5
RB/OM Adapted to new front panels, (SOG and STW) and functions,
instrument and indicator=Display
Update Menu function summary to sw 704021C0
OM
Implemented Alert Mode LP2.21 PSALW, updated company
name,
3 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
NMEA universal SD4 Display, Technical Description
1.
Background
The SAL SD4 is a versatile display used primarily as a display to indicate speed,
distance and depth. It can also be used to remotely control such equipment, which is not
easily accessible or has no user interface, for example a speed log or an interface
cabinet.
The SD4 Display is intended as a successor to the SD1 and SD2 Displays. The different
Display versions of the SD4 series are utilised using the same main body, 704000.
2.
Definitions and abbreviations

The new performance standard IMO MSC.191(79) states that standardised terms and
definitions shall be used. The SAL speed logs have historically used the terms Bottom
Track (BT) for Speed Over the Ground (SOG) and Water Track (WT) for Speed
Through the Water (STW) related information.
Abbreviation
SDx
SD4
NMEA0183
STW
STW -L
STW T
WAT
WAT L, -T
SOG
SOG -L
SOG -T
GND
GND L, -T
Trip
DIST
ROT
ESD
Description
Serial Display family
Serial Display 4
IEC61162-1 ed2 serial interface standard
Speed Trough the Water.
This is equivalent to Water Track (WT) speed (relative)
Speed Trough the Water Longitudinal
Speed Trough the Water Transversal
Water - refer to resulting distance (relative)
Water - refer to distance,
Longitudinal, Transversal
Speed Over the Ground.
This is equivalent to Bottom Track (BT) speed (true)
Speed Over the Ground Longitudinal
Speed Over the Ground Transversal
Ground refer to resulting distance (true)
Ground refer to distance,
Longitudinal, Transversal
Trip distance counter, resettable
Total distance counter
Rate Of Turn
Echo sounder display
4 (35)
Consilium
3.
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
Design, general
3.1. Display windows

There are two small and one large display window on the Printed Circuit Board.
Depending on type of SD4 Display some windows can be partly or completely covered
by the front panel foil. The two small windows are positioned over each other in the top
part of the SD4, from here on called SPEED WINDOW 1 and SPEED WINDOW 2.
The large window is positioned on the bottom part of the SD4, from here on called
MODE WINDOW. The display elements in each SPEED WINDOW consist of 90
surface mounted Light Emitting Diodes positioned to perform three digits in a 7segment manner. The MODE WINDOW consists of 1056 LEDs positioned in 11 rows
by 96 columns making it possible to display both text and digits in various sizes.
3.2. Direction arrows, status indications and backlight

71 LEDs are used for direction arrows, status indication and backlight illumination of
text printed on the panel foil.
3.3. Pushbuttons
To operate the SD4, there are 6 push buttons positioned below the MODE WINDOW.
4.
Function, general
All SD4 versions will decode all defined messages and display all possible information
if available. Generally, all SD4 Displays can enter all requested modes.
4.1. MODE WINDOW

The mode window can display a range of information, for example distance counters,
speed, depth and rate of turn depending on which modes are enabled in the SD4 set-up
(see chapter 6. Set-up of SD4 for detailed information). All SD4 Displays are delivered
with some modes pre-set that corresponds to the SD4 version but all modes can be
enabled in the SD4 set-up.
Every time the MODE button is pressed, the MODE window will display the next
option from the list of chosen options. When MODE and - buttons are pressed
simultaneously the previous option in the list will be displayed.
When the Trip/DIST button is pressed and Trip or DIST is not displayed, the first Trip
or DIST will be displayed.
When the Trip/DIST button is pressed and Trip or DIST is displayed the next Trip or
DIST in the list will be displayed.
When the Trip/DIST button is pressed and the last Trip or DIST is displayed the first
Trip or DIST will be displayed.
When trip value is presented and the RESET TRIP button is pressed for 2 seconds the
displayed trip distance value will be set to zero.
5 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
4.2. Distance and trip counters

8 counters are used for distance run information.
DIST
total Distance trough water (resulting)
WAT
Note: if no transversal speed information is available, this distance is
counted as if transversal speed is 0,00Kn
TRIP
trip
Distance trough water (resulting), resettable.
WAT
TRIP
trip
Distance trough water Longitudinal, resettable.
WAT-L
This trip is not incremented (as default) when speed is astern.
TRIP
trip
Distance trough water transversal, resettable.
WAT-T
Transverse speed to the port decreases counter value.
DIST
total Distance over ground (resulting)
GND
TRIP
trip
Distance over the ground longitudinal, resettable.
GND -L
This distance is not incremented (as default) when speed is astern.
TRIP
trip
Distance over the ground transversal, resettable.
GND -T
Transverse speed to the port decreases counter value.
TRIP
trip
Distance over the ground (resulting), resettable.
GND
All distance counters are calculated locally in the SD4 and will be stored in a non
volatile E2PROM in case of a power failure. When $VDVLW messages containing
distance information are received from the speed log system, the total resulting counters
in the SD4 will be synchronised with the total distance counters in the speed log and
thus have the same total values in all connected SD4 Displays.
The trip counters will not be synchronised with the $VDVLW messages and are
therefore always locally calculated in the SD4.
Trip counters have a maximum value of 9999.99 NM and Total counters 99999.9 NM.
4.3. Lamp test

By pressing both "DIM" keys simultaneously during operation, the SD4 will light all
segments and indicators.
4.4. Illumination of pushbuttons

EL backlight of the membrane switches is integrated in the panel foil. The EL lamp has
an estimated lifetime of 20.000 hours, which means that we could guarantee
functionality for only 2,3 years if the EL lamp was active all the time. To avoid this, the
EL lamp is normally off and will be turned on when needed. As soon as any pushbutton
is pressed the EL lamp will be turned on and stay on for 2 minutes.
6 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
4.5. Invalid/unavailable information

Depending on the NMEA formats, invalid data can be indicated by certain status
characters or by missing (NULL) data fields. In this case the corresponding display field
will be unlit or indicate "---". In some cases, it will also force the display window to
another display mode.
4.6. Incorrect/missing NMEA messages

If syntactically correct NMEA messages are not received within an approximate time
limit of 10 seconds, the SD4 Display will display "NO NMEA" in the Mode display
field.
This means for instance that if a speed display receives properly formatted depth data
only it will not enter the "NO NMEA" mode, but it will keep on decoding and treat all
input data as invalid, except for the depth data.
4.7. External DIM

External DIM is possible by using a dimmer switch or two external pushbuttons or a
toggle switch connected between terminal 7-9 (DIM-) and 8-9(DIM+). The inputs are
normally in a High state and an activation of a pushbutton will force the input Low.
4.8. Remote DIM message

All SD4 versions have the feature of receiving and processing the remote $PSALR
message transmitted from another SD4 Display. When this is done the receiving SD4
changes its light level to the same intensity as the transmitting SD4.
(See chapter 6.
Set-up of SD4.)
4.9. 200 p/NM speed output pulses

All SD4 versions are able to transform the received speed value to 200 pulses/nautical
miles on their output. The output can source +5VDC, 35mA. A parameter is used to
choose function of the output. (See chapter 6.
Set-up of SD4)
If a potential free relay contact is needed the SD4 can be equipped with an extension
board containing relays which is ordered separately (See chapter 14.4.
SD4EB
Extension board 704110.)
7 (35)
Consilium
5.
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
Function, SD4 versions
5.1. SD4-1, U/N 704041, One axis STW and SOG

SD4 Display for; One axis STW and SOG and corresponding distance (SAL T2s, T1
systems).
STW
kn
SOG
kn
SAL
SD4-1
Mode
Test
Press
2 sec
Mode
Esc
Trip /
DIST
Reset
Trip
Menu
Enter
+
DIM
U/N 704041
Consilium
SPEED WINDOW 1
STW (longitudinal) [88.8]. Arrows indicate forward or aft.
SPEED WINDOW 2
SOG (longitudinal) [88.8]. Arrows indicate forward or aft.
MODE WINDOW
Pre-set display modes:
DIST WAT
Trip WAT
Trip GND
Depth sensor (from ESD)
Alert
8 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
5.2. SD4-2, U/N 704042, Two axis STW and SOG

SD4 Display for; Two axis STW and SOG and corresponding distance (SAL T2/T3
systems). In the top right corner two LEDs will indicate if STW or SOG is displayed in
the two SPEED WINDOWS. By default, SOG will be displayed if it is available. If
SOG is not available STW will be displayed and if no valid speed is available --- will
be displayed. It is possible to force the SD4-2 to indicate STW by pressing the STW
button. The LED over the STW button will then be lit and only STW will be displayed
in the SPEED WINDOWS until the STW button is pressed again.
Longitudinal
kn
STW
SAL
SD4-2
SOG
Transverse
kn
Mode
Test
Press
2 sec
Mode
STW
Trip /
DIST
Reset
Trip
Esc
Menu
Enter
+
DIM
U/N 704042
Consilium
SPEED WINDOW 1
STW or SOG (longitudinal) [88.8]. Arrows indicate forward or aft.
SPEED WINDOW 2
Transverse SOG [88.8]. Arrows indicate port or starboard. If the SD4-2 is set to display
STW and no transverse STW is available, this window and its indication arrows will be
unlit.
MODE WINDOW
DIST WAT
Trip WAT
Trip GND
Alert
9 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
5.3. SD4-3, U/N 704043, One axis STW

SD4 Display for; One axis STW and distance (SAL R1a systems).
STW
kn
SAL
SD4-3
Mode
Test
Press
2 sec
Mode
Esc
Trip /
DIST
Reset
Trip
Menu
Enter
+
DIM
U/N 704043
Consilium
SPEED WINDOW 1
STW (longitudinal) [88.8]. Arrows indicate forward or aft.
SPEED WINDOW 2
Covered by front foil
MODE WINDOW
DIST WAT
Trip WAT
Alert
10 (35)
Art No. 704005B1
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
5.4. SD4-4, U/N 704044, General Display
SAL
SD4-4
NMEA A in
NMEA B in
NMEA A out
NMEA B out
Pulse output
SDR2
SDR2 / Ext Dim SDR2 / Ext Dim +
0 VDC
10..32 VDC
(12 or 24 VDC nominal)
704074 SD4-4 Label
Test
Mode
Esc
Menu
Enter
+
DIM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U/N 704044
Consilium
MODE WINDOW
STW-L (longitudinal)
11 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
5.5. SD4-5, U/N 704045, Docking log Display

SD4 Display exclusively designed for Docking log applications and displays transverse
SOG of bow and stern and longitudinal SOG. The SD4-5 will switch to STW when no
SOG is available. The STW and STW indicators will be lit to indicate mode.
If only transverse speed in the stern is available, (or PSALL contains no dockinglog
information), the transverse indicators only shows "---" to indicate that docking log
information is not available.
If no transverse speeds are available (such as STW from the SAL T2 log) the transverse
window and indication arrows will be unlit.
NMEA A in
NMEA B in
NMEA A out
NMEA B out
Pulse output
SDR2
SDR2 / Ext Dim SDR2 / Ext Dim +
0 VDC
10..32 VDC
(12 or 24 VDC nominal)
704075 SD4-5 Label
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SAL
SD4-5
Test
STW
SOG
knots
m/s
+
DIM
Consilium
SPEED WINDOW 1
Transverse SOG or STW in bow [88.8]. Arrows indicate port or starboard.
SPEED WINDOW 2
Longitudinal STW or SOG [88.8]. Arrows indicate forward or aft.
MODE WINDOW
The MODE WINDOW is partly covered by the front foil, an opening in the same size as
the SPEED WINDOWS is left to display transverse STW or SOG in stern [88.8].
Arrows indicate port or starboard.
In the SD4-5 the ID used for remote dimming is set to number 5, there is no MENU
system available in the SD4-5 and therefore this fixed ID can not be changed.
12 (35)
Consilium
6.
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
Set-up of SD4
6.1. Entering the MENU system

If the MODE button is pressed for 5 seconds the red text under the pushbuttons will be
shown and the text PRESS ENTER FOR MENU will be displayed in the MODE
window. If enter is pressed within 5 seconds, access to the MENU system is granted,
otherwise the MODE window will return to its previous mode.
When entered the menu system and no button is pressed for 3 minutes, the MODE
window will return to its previous mode as it was before the MENU system was entered.
6.2. Menu navigation

The MENU system is built up in the same way as in the SAL speed logs. Parameters in
the local SD4 Display always start with an L. for example LP for local properties.
The MENU button is used to step to the next menu or input field. MENU and -
pressed simultaneously is used to step back to the previous menu or input field. ENTER
is used to go into a submenu and to store changed values. DIM+/- is used to change
values. ESC or MENU + ENTER is used to step back to a previous submenu level in
LOCAL mode.
In REMOTE DEV mode (SD4 functions as a remote user interface) ESC will always
break the connection to the remotely controlled equipment and return to the REMOTE
menu (for example R2(/2) R1A) therefore only MENU and ENTER pressed
simultaneously (and not ESC) can be used as menu level step back when navigating the
menu system in remotely connected equipment.
Information that is possible to change by pressing DIM+/- buttons is displayed within
brackets [ ].
6.2.1.
BASIC MENU
BASIC MENU is the start menu when entering the MENU system. It can look different
depending on different settings in the Local Settings menu.
SD4-1 LOCAL
Typical BASIC MENU with only SD4-type, set in MENU LP1
SD4-1 LOCAL
REMOTE DIM [OFF]
If one or more ID for Remote DIM is set in MENU LS2, REMOTE DIM of other SD4 is
displayed. The REMOTE DIM can be set to either ON, OFF or EXTERNAL (closer
described in chapter 6.3.
REMOTE DIM set-up).
13 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
6.2.2.
Local Properties MENU (LP0 PROPERTIES):
When pressing the MENU button in the BASIC MENU, LP0 PROPERTIES is
displayed. Setting of local properties is done under this menu.
For example:
SD4 type
Select options to display in the MODE WINDOW
Startup DIM
External inputs / outputs

See chapter 6.5.
Menu function summary, for a complete list of MENU choices
6.2.3.
Remote Setup MENU (LS0 REMOTE SETUP):
When pressing the MENU button in the LP0 Local Properties MENU, LS0 REMOTE
SETUP is displayed. Setting of remote properties is done under this menu.
For example:
SD4 id
DIM offset
Remote dim id

See chapter 6.5.
Menu function summary, for a complete list of MENU choices
6.2.4.
REMOTE DEV (MENU R0):
Remote User interface to other equipment.
When MENU R0 is entered the SD4 will establish communication with all connected
equipment and display them in a list of menu choices. When a choice is made the
communication starts with that equipment. ESC is used to step back to select another
equipment.
Example of a menu walk in the R0 menu:
R0 REMOTE DEV
CONNECT
[Enter]
SYNCHRONISING
(counting down from 3)
wait 3 seconds
R1 DEVICE 1 OF 2
BTU 1
(T2A)
[MENU]
R2 DEVICE 2 OF 2
WTU 1
(R1A)
[ENTER]
LH
7.89 7.91
RC=495 1055:1055
Access to the menu system in the WT unit. To exit back to
local mode the ESC button must be used. The ESC button
will always step out of the remotely controlled menu
14 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
menu system.
MENU+ENTER is used to step back within the remotely
controlled menu system.
[ESC]
R2 DEVICE 2 OF 2
WTU 1
(R1A)
[ESC or MENU+ENTER]
R0 REMOTE DEV
CONNECT
If the MODE button is pressed when inside the MENU system, help text will be
displayed. For example when connected as a remote user interface and the mode button
is pressed, information will be displayed about the controlled equipment. If inside the
menu system to the BT unit the following text will be displayed as long as the MODE
button is pressed down.
REMOTE: T2A
6.3. REMOTE DIM set-up

It is possible to control the SD4 brightness from another SD4. ID numbers of up to four
SD4 Displays which are to be controlled can be chosen in menu LS3. SD4 Displays with
ID that corresponds will have the same brightness as the master SD4 Display. This gives
possibility to have the same brightness on up to four SD4 Displays on the bridge,
without SD4(s) on other locations being affected. (More SD4 Displays can have the
same ID, which makes it possible to dim more than four SD4 Displays.)
The ID number of the SD4-5 can not be changed and is always set to 5.
When REMOTE DIM is activated in menu LS3 the second row of the BASIC MENU
will display REMOTE DIM [OFF].
- As long as this setting is OFF this SD4 display will not send out any remote dim
messages.
- When set to ON, remote dim messages will be sent out to other SD4 Displays when
the DIM pushbutton on the display or when the external input are used for dimming.
-
When set to EXT this SD4 Display will not send out any remote dim messages when
the pushbuttons on the display are used for dimming but when the external input is
used remote dim messages will be sent out. (See 6.4.2. External DIM set-up
(Terminal 7 + 8) for explanation of external dim input.)
15 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
6.4. External output/inputs

The SD4 Displays has one output and three inputs. Function of the output and inputs are
set with parameters in the menu system.
Function
Terminal
5
Pulse output
6
7
8
IN1 SDR2
IN2 ext DIM / SDR2
IN3 ext DIM / SDR2
The output can source +5VDC maximum 35mA.

Function is set with parameter LP6.
The inputs are activated by connecting them with
0VDC, not activated inputs are pulled up to
+5VDC. Function is set with parameter LP5.
6.4.1. 200 p/NM speed output pulses set-up (Terminal 5)

It is possible to use the SD4 as an interface converting incoming NMEA speed values to
industry-standard 200 pulses/nautical miles on the output Function is set with parameter
LP6.
6.4.2. External DIM set-up (Terminal 7 + 8)
External DIM is used to DIM the SD4 by means of two pushbuttons or a toggle switch.
When parameter LP5 is set to DIM, then activation of input 2 has the same function as
pressing button 5 (DIM -) on the SD4 itself and activation of input 3 has the same
function as pressing button 6 (DIM +).
6.4.3. External Remote control SDR2 set-up (Terminal 6 + 7 + 8)
SDR2 is a simple remote control of the 6 pushbuttons, which is activated when
parameter LP5 is set to SDR2.
16 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
6.5. Menu function summary

No
Name
LP0
LP1
LP2
SD4- LOCAL
PROPERTIES
SD4 TYPE
SD4- [ ]
MODE WINDOW
LP2.01
DIST WATER
LP2.02
TRIP WAT-L
LP2.03
TRIP WAT-T
LP2.04
TRIP WATER
LP2.05
DIST GROUND
LP2.06
TRIP GND-L
LP2.07
TRIP GND-T
LP2.08
TRIP GROUND
LP2.09
DIST+TRP WAT
LP2.10
DIST+TRP GND
LP2.11
TRIP WAT+GND
LP2.12
LP2.13
LP2.14
LP2.15
LP2.16
LP2.17
LP2.18
LP2.19
SPEED SOG-L
SPEED SOG-T
SPEED SOG
SPEED STW-L
SPEED STW-T
SPEED STW
DEPTH (ESD)
SENSOR: No offset
KEEL: Negative offset
SURF: Positive offset
DEPTH (LOG)
LP2.20
ROT
Default setting
Function
SD4 SD4 SD4 SD4
-1
-2
-3
-4
BASIC MENU
Select properties menu
1
2
3
4
Sets type of SD4 display,
SD4-1.. SD4-4 (factory setting)
List of information to be displayed
in the MODE WINDOW:
OFF Total distance counter of STW
ON
ON
ON
(resulting)
OFF OFF OFF OFF Trip distance counter of STW
longitudinal
OFF OFF OFF OFF Trip distance counter of STW
transversal
OFF Trip distance counter of STW
ON
ON
ON
(resulting)
OFF OFF OFF OFF Total distance counter of SOG
(resulting)
OFF OFF OFF OFF Trip distance counter of SOG
longitudinal
OFF OFF OFF OFF Trip distance counter of SOG
transversal
OFF OFF Trip distance counter of SOG
ON
ON
(resulting)
OFF OFF OFF OFF DIST WAT and TRIP WAT
are displayed simultaneously
OFF OFF OFF OFF DIST GND and TRIP GND
OFF OFF OFF OFF TRIP WAT and TRIP GND
OFF OFF OFF OFF SOG longitudinal
OFF OFF OFF OFF SOG transversal
OFF OFF OFF OFF SOG (resulting)
OFF OFF OFF ON
STW longitudinal
OFF OFF OFF OFF STW transversal
OFF OFF OFF OFF STW (resulting)
OFF OFF OFF Depth from Echosounder display
ON
with offset according to $SDDPT
message.
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
17 (35)
Depth from speed log. (not to be

used for navigation)
Rate of turn (only available if a
gyro is connected to the system)
Consilium
No
Name
LP2.21
LP2.22
LP2.23
LP3
ALERT
DUALLOG
STANDBY STW
STARTUP DIM
[50%]
NEG SPD USE
[OFF]
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
Default setting
Function
SD4 SD4 SD4 SD4
-1
-2
-3
-4
OFF Display alert messages (PSALW)
ON
ON
ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF DISABLED (For future use.)
OFF OFF OFF OFF Deactivates valid STW NMEA to
invalid STW NMEA
50% 50% 50% 50% Default brightness after a reset
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Longitudinal distance counters and

pulse output off at negative speed
LP5 EXT INPUTS

[DIM]
LP6 EXT OUTPUT
[STW-L]
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
STWL
STWL
STWL
STWL
Sets functions of external inputs.

DIM or SDR2
Sets functions of external outputs:
LP7
NMEA GATE
THROUGH [OFF]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
LP8
NMEABAUDRATE
[4800]
SW REVISION
704021xx
RESET TOTAL
LOCAL DISTANCE
RESET TOT
CONFIRM [NO]
CAUTION. Always OFF when

connected back to the Log system,
(used if more displays are
connected in series)
4800 /38400
CAUTION. Do not change.
704021xx for SD4-1,2 and 3
704024xx for SD4-4
NO
NO
NO
NO
Reset all total counters in the SD4

display to 0.
NO
NO
NO
NO
Sets all menu parameters in the

SD4 Display to default value.
(Depending on type of SD4)
Select Remote setup menu
ID number between 0-26.
Other SD4 Displays that have
entered this ID in parameter LS3
can remotely DIM this SD4
Offset from remote DIM command
LP4
LP5
LP6
LP9
LPA
LPA.01
LPB
LPB.01
LS0
LS1
LS2
LS3
LS3.01
200 P/NM STW-L

200 P/NM SOG-L
SET DEFAULT
MENU PARAMETERS
RESET MEN
CONFIRM [NO]
REMOTE SETUP
SD4 ID
[4]
DIM OFFSET
[0 %]
REMOTE DIM
ID
SD4 Displays that have ID

numbers corresponding will be
remotely dimmed from this SD4.
Max 4 ID can be entered.
REMOTE DIM
The first instrument ID can be

18 (35)
Consilium
No
Name
LS3.02
LS3.03
LS3.04
LS4
LS5
LS6
LS7
R0
ID [ ]
REMOTE DIM
ID [ ]
REMOTE DIM
ID
[]
REMOTE DIM
ID
[]
HEARTBEAT
TIMEOUT [30]S
MENU ACKN
TIMEOUT [3]S
SD2 REMOTE
DIM [OFF]
R0 REMOTE
ACCESS [ENABLED]
Serial Displays SD4
Default setting
Function
SD4 SD4 SD4 SD4
-1
-2
-3
-4
entered
The second SD4 ID can be entered
The third SD4 ID can be entered
The fourth SD4 ID can be entered
30
30
30
30
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
EN
EN
EN
EN
REMOTE DEV
CONNECT
R1
DEVICE 1 OF x )
<NAME> (<ID>)
R2
DEVICE 2 OF x )
<NAME> (<ID>)
R3
Art No. 704005B1
19 (35)
Time between heartbeat is sent to

the remote device
Maximum time for acknowledge
signal from the remote device
Makes it possible to remotely DIM
old SD1/SD2 instruments
Enables menu R0 making it
possible to remotely connect to
other devices.
[SUSPEND]
[ENABLED] (Default)
[DISABLED]
Access to menu system in remote
systems. (LS7 sets if this menu
shall be enabled)
x: Number of available remote
systems
ID: ID of the remote system
NAME: Name of the remote
system
x: Number of available remote
systems
ID: ID of the remote system
NAME: Name of the remote
system
There will be as many R menus as
there are remote systems
connected.
Consilium
7.
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
Serial Data message definitions

The messages that are used for the SD4 Displays are defined in a separate document,
"Technical Document 700164". Please consult this for complete message definitions.
8.
Technical data
Powering
Input voltage
Current
10 - 32 VDC (12 or 24 VDC nominal)

Maximum 200 mA at 15VDC, typical 100mA
Environmental conditions
As required by IEC 60945 4th edition. If panel mounted on a watertight flat surface or in
a SD4 BMB box according to exposed category, otherwise protected.
Watertight as required by IEC 529 category IP66 if mounted in SD4 BMB, SD4SA or
panel mounted on a flat surface.
Compass safe distance: 0.3m
Nominal viewing distance
- Fixed information printed on the front foil: 1m

- Speed windows: 3.7m
- Small font in Mode window: 2.7m
- Large font in Mode window: 6.2m
Inputs and outputs
Serial:
Isolated IEC61162-1 (NMEA) standard input.

Standard IEC61162-1 (NMEA) output, based on RS485 driver
Remote inputs: 3 inputs with internal pull-up to +5V, activated by grounding to 0V.
+5VDC output: One output with 35mA current capacity.
Connections
Connections of power, inputs and output are done via a 10-pole plug-in terminal,
maximum cable area 1.5 mm.
Dimensions
144 x 144 x 15 mm, mounts in standard panel cut-out.
20 (35)
Consilium
9.
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
Installation and testing
9.1. Mounting
The four attaching holes in the SD4 are threaded with an M6 thread making it possible
to mount the SD4 either with four M6 screws from the back or with four M5 screws
from the front using nuts on the backside. When the SD4 is mounted on a flat surface
using M5 screws with nylon washers from the front and the provided neoprene gasket is
used, a protection of IP66 is achieved.
Mechanical dimensions and panel cut-out:
21 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
9.2. Downloading of new software

The SAL SD4 is delivered with the software installed in a flash memory. If, however, an
update of software would become necessary, please refer to utility program WinFlash,
706080, available from Consilium when required.
9.3. Testing
If the SD4 is programmed to type SD4-0 a test sequence is performed.
(Not valid for SD4-5)
1. Diode test:
A number of test patterns are displayed to ensure that all LEDs are OK. Press any
button to step to the next pattern
2. Input test:
IN1, IN2 and IN3 is displayed together with status information. Press both DIM
buttons simultaneously to step to the next test.
3. Output test:
The output is pulsed with a frequency of 1 Hz. Press both DIM buttons
simultaneously to step to the next test.
4. Buttons test:
When a button is pressed a button number is displayed. Press both DIM buttons
simultaneously to end the test and jump to menu LP1 SD4 TYPE where the actual
SD4 Display type is entered, such as SD4-1, SD4-2, SD4-3 or SD4-4.
22 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
10. Speed Log Master Display

10.1. General
To remotely control the Menu system in speed logs and other equipment in the speed
log system one SD4 Display positioned on the bridge is used as a remote control. This
SD4 Display is named Speed Log Master Display and has to be marked in such a way
that it is clearly distinguishable from all other SD4 Displays connected to the log
system.
The Speed Log Master Display can also be used to remotely control the dimming
function in other SD4 Displays connected to the system. In installation where more than
one SD4 Display are connected as Speed Log Master Display, those additional SD4
Displays are primarily connected with remote control functionality to be able to control
the dimming function in other SD4 Displays but can also be used to control the Menu
system in speed logs and other equipment. Those additional remote SD4 Displays do not
have to be labelled but the remote control function shall be clearly indicated in
installation drawings and other documentation.
10.2. Positioning of the Speed Log Master Display

The Speed Log Master Display is preferable positioned on the bridge where it can be
accessed without interfering with the normal operation of the ship, for example at the
chart table.
10.3. Electrical connection

The Speed Log Master Display is connected with two-way communication to the
Speed Log system. This means that it has to be connected with one pair of wires sending
data to the Speed Log Master Display and one pair of wires sending data back to the log
system. Other SD4 Displays without remote control functionality only have one pair of
wires sending data to the SD4 Display.
Speed Log Master Display:
4 wires for the serial communication
2 wires for DC power supply
Other SD4 Display:
2 wires for the serial communication
2 wires for DC power supply
23 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
10.4. Positioning of the labels

In every shipment of a SAL speed log a set of two labels are included inside the Speed
Log electrical cabinet. The installation company shall place one of those labels on or at
the Speed Log Master Display.
One label, with the text "Master", is intended for placing on the surface of the Speed
Log Master Display under the SD4 type. The other one, with the text "Speed Log
Master Display ", is for placing on the control consol at the Speed Log Master Display.
Longitudinal
kn
STW
SAL
SD4-2
SOG
Transverse
kn
Mode
Test
Press
2 sec
Mode
STW
Trip /
DIST
Reset
Trip
Esc
Menu
Enter
+
DIM
U/N 704042
Consilium
24 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
11. Alert messages

The Alert mode is to be used for service purposes and trouble shooting of the SAL
speed log system. A list of alert codes can be found in this manual or from Consilium
when required.
The Alert mode is enabled as default in menu LP2.21. In this mode, Consilium
proprietary $PSALW NMEA messages will be translated and displayed as Alerts on the
SD4 mode window.
SD4 Displays, with the Alert mode enabled, will lit the LED over the Mode button when
the SD4 Display receives active Alert messages.
Longitudinal
kn
STW
SAL
SD4-2
SOG
Transverse
kn
Mode
Test
Press
2 sec
Alert LED
Mode
STW
Trip /
DIST
Reset
Trip
Esc
Menu
Enter
+
DIM
U/N 704042
Consilium
The Alert message is displayed in the Mode window with the following field
descriptors:
ALERT XXX
YYY
TEXT
XXX: Alert number.
YYY: Input in LPU2 if applicable.
TEXT: 16 characters alert description text.
When an Alert message is received the Mode window will switch to ALERT mode and
display the message.
Example of STW simulation Alert from the STW Speed log:
ALERT 301 LPUIN5
STW SIMULATION
The text LPUIN5 is refering to that the Alert message is received on an LPU2 input
no 5 and is only showing when the SD4 is connected to an LPU2.
25 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
If more than one Alert message is sent to the SD4 Display, the Alerts are stored in a list
in the sequence they were received. To view next Alert message press the MODE
button.
The SD4 has a capacity of storing a maximum of 10 Alerts.
If more than 10 different Alerts are received, Alert nr 11 and further the Mode window
show:
ALERT 999 -------- OVERFLOW --An Alert is treated as inactive when indicated in the received NMEA message or after a
timeout of one minute if no more Alert messages are received with the corresponding
Alert number.
If no Alerts are received, the Alert mode on the Mode window will show:
ALERT ---
26 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
12. Standby STW

This function can be used to deactivate the STW-log. When using the standby function
the SD4 has to be connected with two-way communication to the Speed Log system
such as the Speed Log Master Display.
Set the local menu LP2.23, STANDBY STW, to ON. WARNING: the standby mode is
not valid for normal operation. The standby mode must only be used for special
purposes.
Note! The software in the WTU (Water Track Unit) has to be 700210E2 or later.
Use the Mode button to toggle until the Mode window shows;
STW ACTIVE
[-+] FOR STANDBY
Press and release both DIM buttons, (- and +) simultaneously to deactivate the STWlog.
When the STW-log is deactivated the Mode window will show:
STW DEACTIVATED
ANY KEY TO START
To start/activate the STW-log, press any key.
If the SD4 Mode window shows:
STW UNIT STANDBY
NOT POSSIBLE
the SD4 did not establish contact with the STW-log due to older software in the WTU
and/or that the SD4 is not connected two-way to the SAL log system.
27 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
13. Suspend of remote equipment

To establish communication with some remote devices it might be necessary to first
suspend serial data transmission from other part of that particular equipment. For
example the slave T2R PCB (BTUS1, T2B) used for redundancy in a SAL T3+ speed
log system can only be accessed when the 1st T2R PCB (BTU 1, T2A) in the same speed
log is suspended.
Suspend of a remote unit can be done in R0 REMOTE DEV menu if the SUSPEND
function is activated in menu LS7 R0 REMOTE ACCESS.
To suspend a unit go to the R0 menu as described in chapter 6. Set-up of SD4 and
follow as listed:
R0 REMOTE DEV
CONNECT
> Enter
SYNCHRONISING
. . . 3
Wait 3 seconds.
Then choose which device to suspend in the list of connected devices:
R2 DEVICE 2 OF 2
BTU 1
(T2A)
If you wanted to connect to this device you would press Enter. To Suspend the device
first press + or to display the text SUSPEND:
>+
R2 DEVICE 2 OF 2
SUSPEND
(T2A)
> Enter
SUSPENDING T2A
. . . 12
Wait 12 seconds, then a new synchronising will start
SYNCHRONISING
. . . 3
Wait 3 seconds
R1 DEVICE 1 OF 2
BTUS1
(T2B)
Choose unit to connect to and press Enter.
As soon as you return to the R0 REMOTE DEV menu or leave the menu system the
suspended unit will be reactivated.
28 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
14. Accessories
The SD Display family can be equipped with a number of accessories, including a
mounting box for situations where the SD4 cannot be mounted in panel and an AC
power supply for 115/230 V AC powering.
29 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
14.1. AC power supply, SDP 701219

The AC/DC power supply is specified to supply two SD4 Displays with DC power if
operated from a 230 VAC source. Observe that only one SD4 can be supplied with DC
power when the AC source is 48 or 115 VAC.
14.1.1. Installation
The power supply is designed to be mounted with four screws beside the SD4 and
connected according to the following list:
SD4
SDP
AC power source Note
10:
10 .. 32 VDC P1:
+18 VDC
Red wire on SDP
9:
0 VDC
P2:
0 VDC
Black wire on SDP
P3:
EARTH
EARTH
P4:
230 VAC 230 VAC
Option 1
P5:
115 VAC 115 VAC
Option 2
P6:
48 VAC
48 VAC
Option 3
P0:
0 VAC
0 VAC (N)
30 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
14.2. Bulkhead mounting box, SD4 BMB 704080
The SD4-BMB can be used to mount the SD4 on any flat surface. Mounting is done
either from the front using the supplied mounting brackets or from the back with M5
screws. The cable intake is supplied with a cable gland for IP66 protection for cable
diameters in the range 9 - 13 mm.
The bulkhead mounting box assure that the SD4 is watertight according to IP66. The
SD4 unit itself is also watertight when mounted onto flat panel surface.
31 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
14.3. Stand Alone mounting box, SD4SA 704090
The SD4SA can be used to mount the SD4 standing or hanging. The cable intake is
supplied with a cable gland for IP66 protection for cable diameters in the range 5 - 9
mm.
The SD4SA assure that the SD4 is watertight according to IP66. The SD4 itself is also
watertight when mounted onto flat panel surface.
32 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
14.4. SD4EB Extension board 704110
30,48
66,04
1 2 3 4
The SD4 Extension Board is equipped with two relays, which can be used to obtain
200p/NM speed pulses or for other use in special installation. Parameter LP6 is used to
choose function of the output. (See chapter 6.
Set-up of SD4)
The board is installed directly on the back of the SD4. Unplug the 10-pole terminal from
the SD4, plug in the SD4EB in its place and plug in the 10-pole terminal in the top
contact of the SD4EB. The two relay contacts can now be accessed via terminal block
#1-4 on the SD4EB.
SD4EB
Terminal 1
Terminal 2
Terminal 3
Terminal 4
Note
Relay 1 normally open, max load 30V/30mA or 15V/100mA
Relay 2 normally open, max load 30V/30mA or 15V/100mA
33 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
14.5. SD4ED External Dimmer 704120
144 113
Consilium
SD4 DIMMER
U/N 704120
24
26
48
28,5
The SD4 External Dimmer is used to DIM one SD4 from a remote position.
Parameter LP5 EXTERNAL INPUTS shall be set to [DIM] for the dimmer to function
correctly (See chapter 6.
Set-up of SD4).
More SD4 Displays can be connected to the same dimmer if they are powered from the
same source. All connected SD4 Displays will be dimmed but the intensity level on
different SD4 Displays will not be the same. We therefore recommend using serial
Remote DIM message when more SD4 Displays shall be dimmed to the same intensity.
(See chapter 4.8.
Remote DIM message)
SD4
Terminal 7
Terminal 8
Terminal 9
SD4ED
Terminal 1
Terminal 3
Terminal 2
Function
Dim down
Dim up
0 VDC
34 (35)
Consilium
Serial Displays SD4
Art No. 704005B1
14.6. SD4 SDR2 Remote control 704130
Test
Press
2 sec
48
Mode
WT
Trip/
Total
Reset
Trip
24
DIM
Consilium
U/N 704130
113
144
The SD4 Remote control is used to access the SD4 buttons from a remote position.
Parameter LP5 EXTERNAL INPUTS shall be set to [SDR2] for the remote control to
function correctly (See chapter 6. Set-up of SD4).
Note! The SDR2 is not intended for e.g. calibration
SD4
Terminal 6
Terminal 7
Terminal 8
Terminal 9
Terminal 10
SD4SDR2
Terminal 1
Terminal 2
Terminal 3
Terminal 4
Terminal 5
Terminal 6
Function
In 1
In 2
In 3
Not used
0 VDC
10..32 VDC
35 (35)
Intentionally blank
Consilium
Analogue Speed
Indicator
Doc No. 701402A3
Intentionally blank
Potentiometer with Knob

connected to SIA-2-8
2 (3)
U. Hermansson
S. Gullbert
2002.10.02
701393 A0
Potentiometer for SIA-2-8 Ind.

Type 22/40G, 1kohm, 30W
U/N: 71-71091-00
Analogue Speed Indicator
2002.10.02
Consilium
Doc.: 701402A3
3 (3)
U. Hermansson
S. Gullbert
2002.10.02
701399A0
SIA-2-8
Analogue Indicator
U/N: 71-21049-17
Analogue Speed Indicator
2002.10.02
Consilium
Doc.: 701402A3
Intentionally blank
Consilium
Consilium
SAL T2 with LPU2 system drawings
Art No. 703270A2
SAL T2 with LPU2

system drawings
Document No. 703270
(ref 703265A2)
1 (2)
Consilium
SAL T2 with LPU2 system drawings
Art No. 703270A2
Contents
1.
Introduction
Appendix:
Example of a SAL T2 cable diagram, 703266A2
Example of a SAL T2 cable connection diagram, 703267A2
Revisions
2008-04-08
2008-06-30
2010-10-01
A0
A1
A2
RB
AF
OM
Created
Revision appendix 703266A1 and 703267A1
703266->A2, 703267->A2
1.
Introduction
This section is to fulfil the needs for a normal electrical installation of a SAL T2 system and
contains examples of cable diagram and connection diagram.
2 (2)
Consilium
Consilium
SAL T2+ with LPU2 system drawings
Art No. 703280A1
SAL T2+ with LPU2

system drawings
Document No. 703280
(ref 703285A1)
1 (2)
Consilium
SAL T2+ with LPU2 system drawings
Art No. 703280A1
Contents
1.
Introduction
Appendix:
Example of a SAL T2+ cable diagram, 703286A1
Example of a SAL T2+ cable connection diagram, 703287A1
Revisions
2010-10-29
2011-01-26
A0
A1
OM
OM
Created
Clarified, at least two SD4 displays, one with external power
1.
Introduction
This section is to fulfil the needs for a normal electrical installation of a SAL T2+ system and
contains examples of cable diagram and connection diagram.
2 (2)
Intentionally blank
Intentionally blank
Consilium
IEC 61162/
NMEA 0183
User Guide
Document No. 700164
Consilium
IEC 61162/NMEA 0183 User Guide
Art No. 700164A4
Revisions
Date
Version Author Comment
2007-08-09
2007-09-19
2008-09-12
2010-05-21
2010-10-05
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
RB
RB
RB
OM
RB
Created from 701164 in short version

Released version
PSALS Suspend + id, VLW
Company name changed
PSALS field 2: 46+47, ALR note in field 3
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction .........................................................................................3
2.
Hardware.............................................................................................4
3.
Serial Data message definitions ..........................................................6
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
General.............................................................................................................3
References .......................................................................................................3
Background ......................................................................................................3
2.1.
Connection of cables for serial communication ................................................5
3.1.
Standard IEC 61162-1 3rd ed/NMEA 0183 version 3.01 messages..................7
3.1.1.
Alarm Acknowledge (--ACK) .......................................................................7
3.1.2.
Alarm (--ALR)..............................................................................................7
3.1.3.
Depth (--DPT) .............................................................................................8
3.1.4.
Rate of turn (--ROT)....................................................................................8
3.1.5.
Text Transmission (--TXT)..........................................................................8
3.1.6.
Dual Doppler Velocities (--VBW) ................................................................9
3.1.7.
Distance travelled through the water and over the ground (--VLW)..........10
3.2.
Proprietary Consilium Messages ....................................................................11
3.2.1.
Log control messages (PSALC) ...............................................................11
3.2.2.
Log status messages (PSALc) .................................................................12
3.2.3.
SAL Docking log (PSALL).........................................................................14
3.2.4.
Remote dimming message (PSALR)........................................................14
3.2.5.
Remote control message (PSALS)...........................................................15
3.2.6.
Multiple Units message (PSALU) .............................................................16
2 (17)
Consilium
1.
Art No. 700164A4
Introduction
1.1. General
The purpose of this document is to define the most common serial messages that are used by
Consilium Marine & Safety speed logs, voyage data recorders and interface units as well as
specify the hardware used for serial communication.
The document is intended to be used as a sub-document to operator manuals.
1.2. References
IEC 61162-1:2007(E) standard.

IEC 61162-2:1998(E) standard.
NMEA 0183 v3.01 standard.
1.3. Background
The National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) has developed a specification that
defines the interface between marine electronic equipments called NMEA 0183. This standard
is closely aligned with the standard IEC 61162-1 from International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) which is specified by International Maritime Organization (IMO) to meet
the International convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) regulations.
In this document, as well as in all Consilium Marine & Safety documents, we refer to this
standard as IEC 61162-1/NMEA or IEC 61162-2/NMEA for the high speed version of the
same standard.
The idea of IEC 61162/NMEA is to send a line of data called a sentence that is self contained
and independent from other sentences. There are standard sentences for each device category
and a capability exist to define own / proprietary sentences for use by manufacturers.
3 (17)
Consilium
2.
Art No. 700164A4
Hardware
The IEC 61162-1/NMEA and IEC 61162-2/NMEA standard specifies serial data links with
one talker and multiple listeners, using for each talker a separate signal pair with all listeners
opto-isolated.
Both standards, IEC 61162-1 and IEC 61162-2, use the same serial data message definition
but the hardware has some differences on the receiving side. IEC 61162-2 uses a more
complex receiver stage as it is designed for a higher speed, 38400 b/s (bit per second)
compared to 4800 b/s used in IEC 61162-1.
Complying with IEC 61162-1 and IEC 61162-2 standard, all Consilium Marine & Safety
designed NMEA driver uses RS485 compatible driver circuits, using differential outputs
swinging in the range 0 to +5 Volts. The polarities of the signals are defined by "A" and "B".
In the idling state the "A" terminal carries 0 Volt and the "B" terminal +5 Volts. Maximum
load on each driver circuits is 100 ohm which is equal to ten IEC 61162-1/NMEA inputs in
parallel.
All Consilium Marine & Safety designed IEC 61162-1/NMEA inputs use opto-couplers to
assure isolation between the talker and the listener according to the IEC standard.
IEC 61162-2/NMEA inputs uses opto-isolated RS485 receivers with a DC power supply
which is isolated from case ground as well as from the DC power in the receiving unit.
We do not recommend any other technical solution, than those mentioned above, for
connecting equipment to NMEA networks were Consilium Marine & Safety products are
connected as talkers or listeners. Some early proposals for the IEC 1162-1 permitted also the
use of RS422 receivers, having a DC path between case ground and the receiver circuit. We
strongly discourage such use and recommend the use of a separate, opto-isolated buffer unit if
it is necessary to feed such devices.
The interface speed for IEC 61162-1/NMEA is 4800 b/s with 8 bits of data, no parity, and one
stop bit. At 4800 b/s you can only send 480 characters in one second. Since an NMEA
sentence can be as long as 82 characters you can be limited to less than 6 different sentences
per second. The actual limit is determined by the specific sentences used, but this shows that
it is easy to overrun the capacity of the interface.
4 (17)
Consilium
Art No. 700164A4
2.1. Connection of cables for serial communication

All cables used for serial communication shall be twisted pair and properly shielded.
Maximum recommended cable length is 1000 meter with a minimum cross-section area of 0.5
mm2.
IEC 61162-1/NMEA uses two wires in one pair connected as signal "A" and "B" between
talker and listener.
IEC 61162-2/NMEA uses three wires, two wires in one pair connected as signal "A" and "B"
and a third wire from a separate pair connected as "C" (ground connection between the
transmitting unit and the isolated input stage).
5 (17)
Consilium
3.
Art No. 700164A4
Serial Data message definitions

Two classes of messages are described in this document: industry-standard IEC 61162/NMEA
messages and special proprietary Consilium messages.
Each sentence begins with a '$' (or !) and ends with a carriage return/line feed sequence and
can be no longer than 80 characters of valid characters (plus the line terminators <CR><LF>).
The data is contained within this single line with data items separated by commas. The data
itself is just ASCII text and is normally fully contained in one variable length sentence. The
data may vary in the amount of precision contained in the message. Programs that read the
data should only use the commas to determine the field boundaries and not depend on column
positions. There is a provision for a checksum at the end of each sentence. The checksum is
mandatory and calculated as the eight-bit EXCLUSIVE OR of the ASCII representation for all
characters between the $ and * in the message. Typical messages including checksum are
shown below.
$VDDPT,24.5,,400*57
$VDVBW,7.53,,A,7.83,0.51,A,,V,0.26,A*4B
$TIROT,16.88,A*3C
Note that some early implementations erroneously included the $ character in the checksum
calculation!
The checksum is omitted in all examples that follow in this document.
The used definitions follow the IEC 61162/NMEA standard with the addition of a variable
length integer field to simplify understanding for readers. Note that fields may be empty, i.e.
without any character at all and immediately followed by the comma separator.
Field Type
Status
Variable
length
floating
Variable
length
integer
Fixed hex
Symbol
A
x.x
Definition
Single character field: A=data valid, V=data invalid.
Normal definition of a floating format variable. The integer version
separated into a new definition.
i.
Consilium extension with variable length field. Normal definition of

a short integer format variable.
hh-
Variable text
Fixed alpha
Fixed
number
Fixed text
cc
aaxx-
Hex field with same number of hexadecimal characters as specified.

MSB (Most Significant Bit) to the left.
Valid character field of variable length.
Upper & lower case alpha characters [0..9, Aa, Bb, Cc, Dd, Ee, Ff].
Fixed length integer value.
cc-
Fixed length valid characters.
6 (17)
Consilium
Art No. 700164A4
3.1. Standard IEC 61162-1 3rd ed/NMEA 0183 version 3.01 messages
The intention of Consilium Marine & Safety is to implement the standard messages as defined
in the IEC 61162-1, 3rd edition. This corresponds to the NMEA 0183 version 3.01. All outputs
will, whenever possible, refer only to messages defined in these documents.
The first two characters after the $ sign define the talker identifier. Consilium Marine &
Safety uses the following identifiers:
IN
SD
TI
VD
VR
Integrated Navigation
Sounder, depth
Turn rate indicator
Velocity sensors: Doppler, other/general
Voyage data recorder
(See IEC 61162-1:2007(E) standard for a complete list of talker identifiers.)

3.1.1. Alarm Acknowledge (--ACK)
This sentence is used to acknowledge an alarm condition reported by a device.
1
2
3
$--ACK,xxx*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
Field Type
Name
Definition
Alarm acknowledge
2
3
xxx
hh
Local alarm number

Check sum
Note
VD = Log, VR = VDR,
SD = Depth Sounder
3.1.2. Alarm (--ALR)

This sentence is used to report an alarm condition on a device and its current state of
acknowledgement.
1
2
3
4 5 6
7
$--ALR,hhmmss.ss,xxx,A,A,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
Field Type
Name
Definition
Alarm
hhmmss.ss
Time of alarm condition
xxx
Local alarm number
4
5
6
7
A
A
cc
hh
Alarm condition
Acknowledge condition
Alarms description text
Check sum
7 (17)
Note
VD = Log, VR = VDR,
SD = Depth Sounder
UTC (Coordinated Universal
Time)
100 .. 199 ESD, 200 .. 299 SOGunit, 300 .. 399 STW-unit, 400 ..
499 LPU2
A = alarm, V = no alarm
A = Acknowledged, V = not
Consilium
Art No. 700164A4
3.1.3. Depth (--DPT)

1
2
3
4
5
$--DPT,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
Field Type
Name
x.x
x.x
Definition
Depth
Depth below transducer [m]
Depth between transducer and
keel or water line[m]
4
5
x.x
hh
Maximum range scale in use

Checksum
Note
VD = Log, SD = Depth sounder
Null field indicates out of range
This figure is unknown to the log
system, so a null field is
transmitted here.
(Fix set to 400 m for SAL T2)
Example: Data from SAL T1 and SAL T2 speed log (depth measured to 30.0 m):
$VDDPT,30.0,,400*
$SDDPT,30.0,,400*
3.1.4. Rate of turn (--ROT)
1
2
3 4
$--ROT,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
4
Field Type
Definition
Note
Name
Rate of turn
TIROT, HEROT, INROT
x.x
Rate of turn [degrees / minute]
"-" is bow turns to port
A
Status
A = data valid, V = data invalid
hh
Checksum
Example: Data from rate of turn gyro (30 degrees / minute clockwise):
$TIROT,30.0,*
3.1.5. Text Transmission (--TXT)

1
2 3 4 5
6
$--TXT,xx,xx,xx,cc*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
4
5
6
Field Type
Definition
Name
Alarm acknowledge
xx
Total number of sentences
xx
Sentence number
xx
Text identifier
c-c
Text message
hh
Check sum
Example: Text message from SD2-16.
VRTXT,01,01,01,START BACKUP*
8 (17)
Note
VD = Log, VR = VDR
Consilium
Art No. 700164A4
3.1.6. Dual Doppler Velocities (--VBW)

Water-referenced and ground-referenced speed data.
Note that this sentence was extended. The speed logs may transmit the shorter version of the
sentence with only the first seven fields plus the checksum field.
1
2
3
4 5
6
7 8
9 A
B C
$--VBW,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,A,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
Field Type
Name
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
x.x
x.x
A
x.x
x.x
A
x.x
A
A
B
x.x
A
hh
Definition
Water-referenced and groundreferenced speed data
Longitudinal water speed
Transversal water speed
Status water speed
Longitudinal ground speed
Transversal ground speed
Status ground speed
Stern Transversal water speed
Status stern transversal water
speed
Stern Transversal ground speed
Status stern transversal ground
speed
Check sum
Note
VDVBW
knots
knots
knots
knots
knots
knots
Unavailable data are transmitted as null fields.

Example: speed through water 10.05 knots, longitudinal speed over ground 11.02 knots,
transversal speed over ground -0,05 knots.
Normal operations
SAL R1
SAL R1a
SAL T1
SAL T2s
SAL T2
SAL T3
$VDVBW,10.05,,A,,,V,,V,,V*
$VDVBW,10.05,,A,11.02,,A,,V,,V*
$VDVBW,10.05,,A,11.02,-0.05,A,,V,,V*
9 (17)
Consilium
Art No. 700164A4
3.1.7. Distance travelled through the water and over the ground (--VLW)
Note that this sentence was extended. Older systems might still transmit the shorter version of
the sentence with only the first five fields plus the checksum field.
1
2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 A
$--VLW,x.x,T,x.x,T,x.x,T,x.x,T *hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
Field Type
Name
x.x
Definition
Note
Distance through water
VDVLW
Total water distance [nautical
minimum range 9999.9
miles]
T
Type
N = Nautical mile
x.x
Trip water distance [nautical
miles]
T
Type
N = Nautical mile
x.x
Total ground distance [nautical
minimum range 9999.9
miles]
T
Type
N = Nautical mile
x.x
Trip ground distance [nautical
miles]
T
Type
N = Nautical mile
hh
Checksum
Example: Data from SAL R1 (total distance 100 nautical miles, trip 3.50 nautical miles):
$VDVLW,100.00,N,3.50,N,,N,,N*
10 (17)
Consilium
Art No. 700164A4
3.2. Proprietary Consilium Messages

Consilium Marine & Safety has been allocated the proprietary mnemonic "SAL" by NMEA.
This means that any message starting with "$PSAL..." emanates from Consilium Marine &
Safety equipment and that any letters following can be chosen by Consilium Marine & Safety.
However, to comply with standard NMEA messages, all these messages uses a five-character
combination $PSAL- before the first delimiter.
These proprietary messages are mainly used for internal programming, trouble-shooting etc
and are only used in normal operation where good alternatives are missing completely.
These messages may be changed without notice.
3.2.1. Log control messages (PSALC)
Log control message 2: Bottom track transmit control
3.2.1.1.
1
2 3 4
$PSALC,2,i*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
Field Type
Name
i.
i.
Definition
Proprietary SAL Control
Control message type
Note
PSALC
2: SAL T2 BT control
0: Set transmit mode off
1: Set transmit mode on
hh
Check sum
Example: Force acoustic transmitter off:
$PSALC,2,0*
3.2.1.2.
Unit control message 3 (transmit status)

This message is intended for switching NMEA message transmission on or off. The primary
use is to switch off units when information is not needed by sending transmit status "Silent",
and to reactivate by sending "Active".
1
2 3 4
$PSALC,3,c*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
4
Field Type
Definition
Name
Serial control message
i.
c
Transmission status
hh
Checksum
Example: Turn off NMEA transmission:
$PSALC,3,S*
11 (17)
Note
PSALC
3: Transmit status
'A'=Active, 'S'=Silent
Consilium
3.2.1.3.
Art No. 700164A4
Log control message 4: Active speed units

1
2 3
4
5
$PSALC,4,ccc,ccc*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
Field Type
Name
i.
ccc
Definition
Activate WT speed unit
ccc
Activate BT speed unit
3.2.1.4.
Note
PSALC
4: Active speed control
VD1: Log 1
VD2: Log 2
VD9: Simulated Log
VD1: Log 1
VD2: Log 2
GP1: GPS
VD9: Simulated Log
hh
Check sum
Example: Activate WT speed from Log1 and BT speed from Log 2:
$PSALC,4,VD1,VD2*
Log control message 5: Active depth unit
1
2 3
4
$PSALC,5,ccc*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
Field Type
Name
i.
ccc
Definition
Activate depth unit
Note
PSALC
5: Active depth control
VD1: Log 1
VD2: Log 2
SD1: External echosounder
VD9: Simulated Log
hh
Check sum
Example: Activate Log2 as depth unit:
$PSALC,5,VD2*
3.2.2. Log status messages (PSALc)

This status message is used as the acknowledge message for some $PSALC messages.
3.2.2.1.
Log status message 2: Bottom track transmit status

1
2 3 4
$PSALc,2,i*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
5
Field Type
Name
i.
i.
Definition
Proprietary SAL status
hh
Check sum
Example: Status is acoustic transmitter on:
$PSALc,2,1*
12 (17)
Note
PSALc
2: SAL T2 BT status
0: Transmit mode is off
1: Transmit mode is on
Consilium
3.2.2.2.
Art No. 700164A4
Log status message 4: Actived speed units

1
2 3
4
5
$PSALc,4,ccc,ccc*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
Field Type
Name
i.
ccc
Definition
Activated WT speed unit
ccc
Activated BT speed unit
3.2.2.3.
Note
PSALc
4: Activated speed
VD1: Log 1
VD2: Log 2
VD9: Simulated Log
VD1: Log 1
VD2: Log 2
GP1: GPS
VD9: Simulated Log
hh
Check sum
Example: Log1 is the activated WT speed unit and Log 2 is the activated BT speed unit:
$PSALc,4,VD1,VD2*
Log status message 5: Activated depth unit
1
2 3
4
$PSALc,5,ccc*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
Field Type
Name
i.
ccc
Definition
Activated depth unit
hh
Check sum
Example: Log2 is the activated depth unit:
$PSALc,5,VD2*
13 (17)
Note
PSALc
5: Activated depth unit
VD1: Log 1
VD2: Log 2
VD9: Simulated Log
Consilium
Art No. 700164A4
3.2.3. SAL Docking log (PSALL)

Note this sentence was created when the VBW sentence lacked the capability to present stern
speed. The standardised sentence should be used whenever possible.
1
2
3
4
5 6
$PSALL,x.x,x.x,x.x,c*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
4
5
Field Type
Name
x.x
x.x
x.x
c
Definition
SAL docking Log
Longitudinal ground speed
Transversal ground speed of bow
Transversal ground speed of stern
Log status character
Note
PSALL?
knots
knots
knots
'B'=valid bottom track,
'W'=valid water track (only long)
'L'=valid bottom track, unvalid
rate of turn information. Field 3
contains transversal speed from
log, ?field 4 is invalid?
'E'=log error
hh
Checksum
Example: longitudinal speed 1.32 knots, bow -1.11 knots, stern +0.44 knots:
$PSALL,1.32,-1.11,0.44,B*
3.2.4. Remote dimming message (PSALR)

1
2 3 4 5
$PSALR,c,c,i.*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
4
5
Field Type
Name
c
Definition
Remote dimming
Dimmer direction
Note
PSALR?
"+" = increase light,
"-" = decrease light
A Z
0% 100%
c-c
ID of instruments to be dimmed
i.
Dim value
hh
Checksum
This message is intended for using the NMEA network to control groups of indicators.
Whenever a $PSALR message is received by any indicator it adjusts the light level
accordingly. $PSALR messages are generated by SD indicators having remote dimmer
controls. (SD1 and SD2 indicators only uses field 2).
Example:
Increase light on SD1/SD2:
$PSALR,+,,*
Set a light level of 70% on instruments with id E:
$PSALR,,E,70*
14 (17)
Consilium
Art No. 700164A4
3.2.5. Remote control message (PSALS)

The signal used for remote control of the menu system in remote units is $PSALS. The
message includes a signal number, identity and a string data field.
1
2 3
4
5
$PSALS,i.,cc,cc*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
4
5
Field Type
Name
i.
cc
cc
hh
Example: Heartbeat
Definition
Signal data
Signal number
Identity (for receiver)
String data
Checksum
Note
PSALS
*
** Information coded as ASCII
Information coded as ASCII
$PSALS,1,R1A,1234*
* Field 2, signal number:
Signals with number 0 through 49 are used for signals from indicator to log. Signals with
number 50 through 99 are used for signals from log to indicator. Identity is a character field.
Status is the content of the LCD or equivalent presentation unit.
Number
Name
Content
0
Identify
MasterID, informative text
1
Heartbeat
ID, any test data
2
SDataLog request ID, port
3-9
Reserved
10-19
RemoteCmd
ID
20-45
Reserved
46
Activate
ID
47
Deactivate
ID
48
ResumeCmd
ID
49
SuspendCmd
ID
50
Identity
SlaveID, informative text
51
HeartAck
ID, any test data
52
SDataLog acknowl ID, port
53-59
Reserved
60-69
RemoteAck
ID, status
70-95
Reserved
96
Activate ackn.
ID
97
Deactivate ackn. ID
98
StatusInfo
ID, Status (23 char LCD) info
99
SignalUnknown
ID, signal number
100Reserved
15 (17)
Consilium
Art No. 700164A4
** Field 3, identity:
Identity
Comment
IN#
Indicator #, # = A to Z, (INA INZ corresponds to ID 1
- 26)
IND
Indicator 4 (# = D), master of the system
LPU
Log Processing Unit
R1A
First WT unit in the system
R1B
Second WT unit in the system
R1C
Third WT unit in the system
T2A
First BT unit in the system
T2B
Second BT unit in the system
T2C
Third BT unit in the system
T2D
Fourth BT unit in the system
LP1
First LPU in the system
LP2
Second LPU in the system
3.2.6. Multiple Units message (PSALU)

When more than one unit of the same type is installed in a system, (for example two speed
logs), PSALU messages are used to distinguish from which unit the data originate.
3.2.6.1.
Multiple Units message 1, speed data

1
2 3
4
5
6
7
$PSALU,1,ccc,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Field Type
Name
i.
ccc
Definition
Multiple units message
Message type
Unit ID
Note
PSALU?
1: Speed data
VD1: Log 1
VD2: Log 2
GP1: GPS
VD9: Simulated Log
Null field indicates no valid data
x.x
Longitudinal water speed WTL
x.x
Longitudinal ground speed BTL
x.x
Transversal ground speed BTT
hh
Checksum
Example: From log 2, WTL = 20.06, BTL = 21.07, BTT = null:
$PSALU,1,VD2,20.06,21.07,*
16 (17)
Consilium
3.2.6.2.
Art No. 700164A4
Multiple Units message 2, depth data

1
2 3
4
5
6
7
$PSALU,2,ccc,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
Field #
1
2
3
Field Type
Name
i.
ccc
4
5
x.x
x.x
6
7
Definition
Multiple units message
Message type
Unit ID
Depth below transducer [m]

Distance between transducer and
keel or water line[m]
x.x
Maximum range scale in use
hh
Checksum
Example: From log 2, depth = 34.3:
$PSALU,2,VD2,34.3,,*
17 (17)
Note
PSALU?
2: Depth data
VD1: Log 1
VD2: Log 2
VD9: Simulated Log
Null field indicates out of range
Consilium
SAL T-series
Menu System
Article No. 703258
Consilium
SAL T-series Menu System
Art No. 703258C1
Revisions
Date
2001-11-23
2002-04-04
2002-04-10
2002-09-06
2002-10-16
Version
A00
A01
A02
B0
B1
2003-04-22
2004-05-26
2004-10-13
2008-02-13
2008-09-12
B2
B3
B4
C0
C1
1.
Author
STE
STE
STE
STE
STE/RB
Comment
Created from TP00050
Update
Menu corrections
Menu for max depth and T1 added
SAL T1 option clarified, unused menus removed/
Changed name to SAL T-series
STE/JKW
Updated menus for T2/860T software release A4
JKW
Updated menus for T2/T3 software release A5
OM
Corrections
AF/RB/STE Menus A-, F-, S3, T4, V- and Alert messages added.
OM/STE
Corrections, update for software release B2
Background
This document gives a brief overview of the SAL T-series menu system
and use. The menus correspond to software release 702275 Rev: B2.
2.
Jumper settings
2.1. Boot mode selection with JP5

At reset a boot loading process starts up the SAL T-series log. The log
boots from a Flash memory. With a jumper in position JP5, the log boots
into the normal operational mode. Without jumper in position JP5, the log
boot into the production test program.
2.2. Forced test mode with bottom tracking with JP4

When the log is running in normal operation mode and the jumper in
position JP5 is moved to position JP4, the log is forced into a test mode
with fix depth. The depth corresponds to the depth value entered in menu
T1.
This mode generates repetitive transmit patterns and facilitate scope
triggering during trouble shooting.
2.3. Baud rate setting with JP3

The 9-pin DSUB on the T2R PCB can be set to two different baud rates.
When the JP3 is ON the baud-rate is set to 4800, when OFF the baud rate
is 115200. When running e.g. SD4com on the DSUB the setting should
be 4800. The setting should be 115200 when running e.g. DrSal or
updating the software.
2 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
2.4. Redundant slave T2R PCB in SAL T3+ with JP26

The JP26 should only be in position ON when the T2R PCB is the slave
T2R PCB. This only applies if the T-series ELC is a T3+ ELC.
2.5. Watchdog activation via JP21

Watchdog is enabled via JP21. Remove jumper to disable watchdog. Set
jumper JP21 to position 1-2 to get reset pulses every 1.6 seconds. Set
jumper JP21 to position 2-3 for normal operation.
3.
Program update via WinFlash

Program update is possible from a PC running MS-windows. Set JP3 to
OFF, baud rate 115200. Connect the PC to the 9-pin DSUB and run the
program. Program update is not interfering with normal operation except
that changes to the menu system are not allowed via remote operation.
Always reset the T2R PCB after updating the software, by moving JP21
to position 1-2 for more than 1,6sec then back to position 2-3. It is also
possible to reset by using the menu CPU reset in the menu system, or
power circle the system.
4.
Menu system
The menu system, controlled via a remote indicator i.e. the Speed Log
Master Display SD4-x, enables controls and user interaction of the SAL
T-series log. The communication commands are described below. Keys
available are MENU, ENTER, + and -.
4.1. Normal operation

The log in normal operation calculates the speed from the sensor signals.
When a new measurement value is available, it may be shown on the
remote indicator. In normal operation within depth range the readout
mainly uses the following field descriptors:
BTLxx.xxTyy.yy
DT ddd.ddSsss.s
The definition for the field descriptors is found in the table below.
Descriptor
xx.xx / --.-yy.yy / --.-ddd.dd / --.sss.s / --.-
Explanation
Sensed longitudinal speed in knots from transducer.
Field is --.-- if no valid speed is available.
Sensed transversal speed in knots from transducer.
Field is --.-- if no valid speed is available.
Sensed depth below transducer.
Field is --.-- if no valid depth is available.
Sensed signal strength in dB from transducer.
Field is --.-- if no valid signal is available.
3 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
4.2. Menu settings

The menus for parameters and internal settings have a two digit
alphanumeric field Aa to the left followed by a menu name or
abbreviation on the first line on the Speed Log Master Display.
The second line is reserved for value or parameter setting. The readout
thus looks like:
Aa FUNCTION
VALUE OR SETTING
When using the menu system the following key combinations are
possible:
4.2.1.
KEY combination
Explanation
MENU
Go to next menu on the same level
MENU +
Same as MENU
MENU -
Go to previous menu on the same level
MENU ENTER
Return to the above menu level
ENTER
+
Activate menu by executing command or continue on

sub menu level
Increment setting in current menu
Decrement setting in current menu
Menu walk
The keys above can change the current position in the menu tree. Pressing
"Menu" steps to the next menu on the same level. Pressing "Enter" goes
down one level, or if at the lowest level saves current value in nonvolatile memory. Pressing "plus" or "minus" changes the content for the
current menu.
Example to go from Normal operation to menu M2:
press MENU five times followed by ENTER once, then MENU once more.
ENTER
MENU
MENU
ENTER
MENU-
Normal
A0
C0
D0
F0
M0
P0
S0
T0
V0
A1
C1
D1
F1
M1
P1
S1
T1
V1
4 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
4.2.2. Write and read-only access

First level menus include the possibility to select read-only or write
access to the menus on the level below. Some of the first level menus
have Access Denied, for these menus the access level must be changed
in menu M7 from All Users to Authorised Expert. Use "+" or "-" to
select write or read-only access before pressing ENTER to continue on
sub menu level. Displayed readout for write access to submenus thus
appears as:
Aa FUNCTION
WRITE ACCESS ON
and the readout for read-only access appears as:
Aa FUNCTION
WRITE ACCESS OFF
4.2.3. Saving menu content
When saving menu content by pressing ENTER, the following menu
appears for one second:
Aa FUNCTION
SAVE OK
or, when unsuccessful:
Aa FUNCTION
SAVE FAIL
before returning to the normal menu text. If read-only access has been
selected, the "no write access" text appears for one second and the write
operation is inhibited:
Aa FUNCTION
NO WRITE ACCESS
4.2.4. Menu function summary
The list is included for fast indexing. Menus in italic font are currently not
active. Menus with access level All users are directly accessible.
NOTE: Menus with access level Authorised expert must be unlocked
and should only be used by trained service personnel. Be informed that
some combinations of menu values may result in strange behaviour of the
SAL speed log / echo sounder .
No
Access
Level
MM
A0
Name
(NORMAL
OPERATION)
All Users
Default
Range / info
Function
speed info
presented
Timeout to normal operation after

30 seconds. Displayed presentation
according to chapter "Normal
operation".
Number of active and
acknowledged alerts
ALERT LIST
5 (23)
Consilium
A210
All Users
BT: Phase
Roll
A220
All Users
BT: Sig
Balance
A230
All Users
BT:
Transmitter
A201
All Users
BT: Alert
Test
C0
C1
All Users
All Users
CALIBRATION
BT Speed Cal
+0.00%
(-50% to
+50%)
C2
All Users
BT angle Cal
+0.0deg
(180.0 to
+180.0deg)
D0
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
DEBUG
D1
D2
D4
F0
F1
Data Logging
NORMAL COND/
UNACKED ALR/
ACKNOWL ALR
NORMAL COND/
UNACKED ALR/
ACKNOWL ALR
NORMAL COND/
UNACKED ALR/
ACKNOWL ALR
NORMAL COND/
UNACKED ALR/
ACKNOWL ALR
Disabled
Art No. 703258C1
Display and acknowledge phase roll

alert
Display and acknowledge signal
balance alert
Display and acknowledge transmitter
alert
Display and acknowledge test alert
Selects calibration menus
Bottom track speed calibration
factor in %. step=0.01%
Bottom track angular calibration
factor in degrees. step=0.1deg
Selects Debug menus
Data logging disabled / enabled
Watersampling Disabled
Sampling for external diagnostics
BT86Corr
BT corr method
Magnit.
Selects forced testing menus
Force Testing
Force Alert
Disabled
Force an alert on serial output

Force log to enter 7 different depth
track or depth seek mode repeatedly
M1
Authorised
Expert
All Users
All Users
Disabled ForceTrack,
SeekRange =
0..5
Force Ph-Roll Disabled
MISCELLANEOUS
EepromRestore Disabled (Not stored)
M2
All Users
CPU Reset
M4
M5
M6
All Users
All Users
All Users
BT Total Dist Dist=xxx

BT Trip Dist Dist=xxx (Reset)
SW Revision
Rev=xxx
M7
All Users
Access Level
P0
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
PARAMETERS
Selects miscellaneous menus

Restore default values for all
EEPROM settings
Disable watchdog and timeout to
reset
Total BT distance in nautical miles
BT trip distance in nautical miles
The software revision of the
program
All Users: Some first level menus
are locked
Authorised Expert: No menus are
locked
Selects Parameters menus
F2
F3
M0
P1
Force Depth
Transmitter
power
Disabled (Not stored)
All
Users
0..3
6 (23)
Force phase roll test repeatedly
Transmitter power level

0: Adaptive gain control
1: TAS 5
2: TAS 6
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
3: TAS 7 (max transmit gain)

Receiver gain level
0: Adaptive gain control
1: RAS 1
2: RAS 2
3: RAS 3
4: RAS 4 (max receive gain)
5: RAS 1
Depth Seek correlation coefficient
limit for depth lock in
P2
Authorised
Expert
Receiver gain 0
0..5
P3
Depth seek
corr limit
0.955
0 .. 1.000
DepthSeek
gradient
5.01e-5
Depth seek gradient threshold in

depth lock in
Depth track
prop const
300
Depth track proportional constant
Depth track
deriv const
75
Depth track derivative constant
DepthTrack
StepCorr StepCorr
DepthTrack function
Depth track
timout
0.0
Timeout from depth track to search
BT s/n ratio
+14.0dB
Minimum signal to noise ratio for

speed measurement
S0
S1
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
Authorised
Expert
All Users
All Users
S2
All Users
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
PA
PB
PC
PD
PE
PF
PG
PH
PI
PJ
PK
BTT2AlgoLimit 0.95
Bottom track T2 algo limit
Bottomtrack
filter
2.00s
Bottom track unlocked time constant
Corraverage
Dist=
10.00m
Bottom track averaging distance
Zero speed
threshold
0.0800
Zero speed detector threshold
2-dim
adaptation
100
Two dimensional adaptation weight
2-dim
threshold
300
Two dimensional adaptation treshold
2-dim algo
Two dimensional mode select
Echo noise
limit
+3.0dB
Limit for false echo check
86x feedback
150
feedback gain for 86x algo
2-Dim Thres
AccThres
3000
threshold for algo
Max Depth
Limit
400m
Maximum depth presented
SETTINGS
PSALX
telegram
PSALw
Enabled
Disabled
7 (23)
Selects Settings menus

Depth profile information, For
SAL ESD, Echo Sounder Display
Water echo strength, Disabled
Consilium
S3
All Users
S4
All Users
S6
All Users
S7
S9
All Users
All Users
Sa
All Users
T0
T1
All Users
All Users
T2
All Users
T3
All Users
T4
All Users
V0
V1
All Users
All Users
V2
All Users
V3
All Users
V4
All Users
V5
All Users
V6
All Users
V7
All Users
V8
All Users
V9
All Users
VA
All Users
VB
All Users
VC
All Users
VD
All Users
VE
All Users
telegram
ALERT telegrm Enabled
Art No. 703258C1
Allow transmission of Alert

messages
Max Ahead
40
Maximum ahead speed magnitude
[kn]
Lock Timeout 20
Serial data output timeout when
loosing depth lock [sec]
NMEA Interval 1.00
Serial NMEA message interval [s]
VBW format
Extended
Select IEC61162 2nd edition
extended message format or earlier
short message format
Operating
150000
145000 Hz to Select operating frequency in steps
frequency
155000 Hz
of 500 Hz
TEST
Selects Test menus
Simulation
12.00
Simulation
Put simulated speed, BT longitudinal
(dummy)BTL
settings:
as $VDVBW in serial output data,
menu T1-T3
Simulation
0.09
Simulation
Put simulated speed, BT transversal,
(dummy)BTT
settings:
as $VDVBW in serial output data
menu T1-T3
Simulation
10.0
Simulation
Put simulated depth as $VDDPT in
(dummy)Depth
settings:
serial output data
menu T1-T3
Simulation
Approx.
Put simulated data status to invalid
(dummy) no
20sec until
for $VDDPT and $VDVBW in
data
invalid
serial output data
VIEW
Recorded information base menu
System Uptime
0-49710 days Shows uptime for system and
different modes. Total 4 sub menus
SIG
1e-9 to 1
Recorded signal channel levels
direct from depth measurement
AVG
1e-9 to 1
Recorded average signal channel
levels from bottom track speed
measurement
DEPTHSEEK OVF
0x00000000 - Recorded overflow during depth
0xFFFFFFFF
seek
DEPTH-TRK OVF
0x00000000 - Recorded overflow during depth
0xFFFFFFFF
track
DEPTH-TRK HI
0x00000000 - Recorded high signal during depth
0xFFFFFFFF
track
DEPTH-TRK LOW
0x00000000 - Recorded low signal during depth
0xFFFFFFFF
track
SPEED-TRK OVF
0x00000000 - Recorded overflow during speed
0xFFFFFFFF
track
SPEED-TRK HI
0x00000000 - Recorded high signal during speed
0xFFFFFFFF
track
DEPTH-TRK LOW
0x00000000 - Recorded low signal during speed
0xFFFFFFFF
track
SERIAL-IN-ERR
0x00000000 - Recorded serial lines decoding
0xFFFFFFFF
errors
SER-0 ERRORS
0x00000000 - Recorded serial port 0 errors
0xFFFFFFFF
SER-1 ERRORS
0xFFFFFFFF
SER-2 ERRORS
0xFFFFFFFF
8 (23)
Consilium
VF
All Users
SER-3
ERRORS
VG
All Users
DPT-TRK Fails
VH
All Users
T2T
VI
All Users
PHA
0x00000000 0xFFFFFFFF
-99.9 to
99.9
Failures
Art No. 703258C1
Recorded serial port 3 errors

Recorded depth track failures
Recorded transmitter gain failures
Recorded phase roll compensation
4.2.5. Menu A0 Alert list

The Alert list is used to inspect status and acknowledge alerts. Menu A0
displays number of active and acknowledged alerts.
A0 ALERT LIST
0 ACTIVE 0 ACKN
Press ENTER to go into alert list sub menus. The status in the sub menus
can be:
NORMAL COND: Normal condition (no alert).
UNACKED ALR: Active alert, which has not been acknowledged.
ACKNOWL ALR: Active alert, which is acknowledged.
Active alerts are transmitted on the main serial output as a $VDALR
NMEA message at least every minute.
4.2.5.1.
Menu A210 BT: Phase roll
This menu shows status of the phase roll alert.
If the alert is unacknowledged it can be acknowledged by pressing
ENTER.
A210 NORMAL COND
BT: PHASE ROLL
4.2.5.2.
Menu A220 BT: Sig Balance
This menu shows status of the signal balance alert. If the alert is
unacknowledged it can be acknowledged by pressing ENTER.
A220 NORMAL COND
BT: SIG BALANCE
4.2.5.3.
Menu A230 BT: Transmitter
This menu shows status of the transmitter alert. If the alert is
unacknowledged it can be acknowledged by pressing ENTER.
A210 NORMAL COND
BT: TRANSMITTER
9 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
4.2.5.4.
Menu A201 BT: Alert Test
This menu shows status of the test alert (activated from menu F1: forced
alert test). If the alert is unacknowledged it can be acknowledged by
pressing ENTER.
A201 NORMAL COND
BT: ALERT TEST
4.2.6. Menu C0 Calibration
The calibration menus are used to change calibration parameters for SAL
T-series log. Ordinary users may use all menus. Press "+" or "-" to select
write access on or off, ENTER to go into calibration sub menus.
C0 CALIBRATION
WRITE ACCESS OFF
4.2.6.1.
Menu C1 BT speed calibration
The bottomtrack transducer speed (magnitude) calibration is set with this
menu. Press "+" or "-" to change the calibration value to correspond to the
result of the mile run. Save value by pressing ENTER.
C1 BT Speed
Calibrat:RR.RR%
4.2.6.2.
Menu C2 BT angular calibration
The bottomtrack transducer angular calibration is set with this menu.
Press "+" or "-" to change the calibration value to correspond to the result
of the mile run. Save value by pressing ENTER.
C2 BT Angular
Calibrat:RRR.R
4.2.7. Menu D0 DEBUG menus
Only authorised service personnel are allowed to use these menus. The
menus change internals in the SAL T-series log. Press "+" or "-" to select
write or read-only access, ENTER to go into settings sub menus.
D0 DEBUG
WRITE ACCESS OFF
4.2.7.1.
Menu D1 Data Logging
The debug data logging messages may be activated by this menu. Press
"+" or "-" to select. Save selected value by pressing ENTER.
D1 Data Logging
Disabled
4.2.7.2.
Menu D2 Water Sampling
Extra signal sampling for diagnostics purpose may be set with this menu.
Press "+" or "-" to select. Save selected value by pressing ENTER.
10 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
D2 WATERSAMPLING
Disabled
4.2.7.3.
Menu D4 BT86Corr
The BT correlation algorithm may be set with this menu. Press "+" or "-"
to change the value. Save selected value by pressing ENTER.
D4 BT86Corr
Magnitude
4.2.8. Menu F0 Forced testing menus
Only instructed service personnel are allowed to use these menus. Some
menus forces test mode where no normal speed is calculated in the SAL
T-series log. Press "+" or "-" to select write or read-only access, ENTER
to go into settings sub menus.
F0 FORCE TESTING
WRITE ACCESS OFF
4.2.8.1.
Menu F1 Force Alert
This menu is used to activate the test alert message:
$VDALR,,201,A,V,BT: Alert Test*11 on main serial output.
NOTE: Press "+" and ENTER to enable the alert, "-" and ENTER to
disable.
F1 FORCE ALERT
DISABLED
4.2.8.2.
Menu F2 Force Depth
WARNING: the log stops to operate when this mode is active. This menu
forces the SAL T-series log to an unconditional depth track or depth seek
mode where the depth range can be set from 0 to 5.
F2 FORCE Depth
DISABLED
Press + or - to select simulated tracking or seek modes shown in the
examples below. Enter the mode by pressing ENTER. Exit this mode by
pressing MENU, MENU +, MENU - or MENU+ENTER.
F2 FORCE Depth
SIMULATETRACKING
Press ENTER to activate the forced simulated depth tracking. The display
will show fields corresponding to normal depth tracking with the
difference that the first two characters are F2
The depth range can be chosen from 0 to 5 corresponding to the
predefined seek ranges.
F2 FORCE Depth
RANGE=0
11 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
Press ENTER to activate the chosen selection. Each depth range will be
displayed by sub menu F2.0 to F2.5 respectively with the following field
descriptors:
F2.n Axy Qqq.qq
DS ddd.ddSsss.s
Descriptor
Explanation
Depth range 0 to 5
TAS (Transmitter Amplification): 4 to 7
RAS (Receiver Amplification): 1 to 4
Echo quality
Used for testing purposes only and not available in all
modes.
Sensed depth below transducer.
Field is --.-- if no echo is available.
Sensed signal strength in dB from transducer.
Field is --.-- if no valid signal is available.
qq.qq / --.--
ddd.dd / --.sss.s / --.-
4.2.8.3.
Menu F3 Force Phase Roll Test
WARNING: the log stops to operate when in this mode. This menu sets
the SAL T-series log to a repeated phase roll measurement, where the
phase roll measurement between transmitter and receiver for all five
channels can be inspected. NOTE: A TXT sentence is transmitted on the
serial output port with the total and incremental phase roll values.
Testing starts when the + followed by ENTER is pressed.
NOTE: Once enabled this mode continues until leaving menu F3. The log
shall be forced into reset after testing to ensure normal conditions again.
F3 Force PH-Roll
Disabled
The result of the test is displayed at regular updates. NOTE: Only values
below 100 Hz are shown. Values beyond 100 Hz are indicated as ++.+,
and --.- respectively.
F3 PHA
x.x
x.x
x.x
x.x
x.x
4.2.9. Menu M0 Miscellaneous menus

Only instructed service personnel are intended to use these menus. The
M0 MISCELLANEOUS
WRITE ACCESS OFF
12 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
4.2.9.1.
Menu M1 Restore EEPROM to default values
This menu restores the settings for all parameters of the EEPROM to
default values. WARNING: activating this menu erases all calibration
data and user specific settings. Press + to enable.
M1 EEPROMRestore
Disabled
Press ENTER to activate:
M1 EEPROMRestore
Enabled
Successful restore is presented as:
M1 EEPROMRestore
SETTINGSRESTORED
and unsuccessful restore is presented as:
M1 EEPROMRestore
ERROR IN RESTORE
4.2.9.2.
Menu M2 CPU RESET
By activating this menu the retriggering of the watchdog circuitry is
inhibited, and thus a timeout forces the SAL T-series log to reset.
M2 CPU Reset
Disabled
Press + to enable.
M2 CPU Reset
Enabled
Press ENTER to activate. As the menu system is only seen on a remote
display, communication is lost.
4.2.9.3.
Menu M4 BT Total distance
This menu shows the total (BTR) distance for bottom track log. Press "+"
or "-" to change the distance value. Save value by pressing ENTER.
M4 BT TOTAL DIST
DIST=RRRRR.RRNM
4.2.9.4.
Menu M5 BT Trip distance
This menu shows the total distance for bottom track log. Press ENTER to
reset the distance to zero.
M4 BT TRIP DIST
DIST=RRRRR.RRNM
13 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
4.2.9.5.
Menu M6 SW Revision
See the software revision of the application code.
M4 SW revision
Rev 702275XX
4.2.9.6.
Menu M7 Access Level
Change access level for some first level menus. First step to the menu by
pressing "Menu". Press "+" or "-" to select access level. Save value by
pressing ENTER.
M5 Access Level
All Users
NOTE: For All Users some first level menus are locked.
Or
M5 Access Level
AuthorisedExpert
NOTE: For Authorised Expert no menus are locked. The Authorised
Expert access level shall only be used by instructed service personnel.
4.2.10.
Menu P0 Parameters for technical set-up

Only instructed service personnel are intended to use these menus. The
P0 PARAMETERS
WRITE ACCESS OFF
4.2.10.1. Menu P1 Transmitter power
The Transmitter power is set with this menu. First step to the menu by
pressing "MENU". Press "+" or "-" to change the value. Save value by
pressing ENTER. NOTE: Level 0 is auto, 1, 2 and 3 are reserved for fix
transmit level.
P1 Transmitter
Power=N
4.2.10.2. Menu P2 Receiver gain
The receiver gain is set with this menu. First step to the menu by pressing
"MENU". Press "+" or "-" to change the value. Save value by pressing
ENTER. NOTE: gain 0 is auto, 1, 2, 3 and 4 are reserved for fix gain.
P2 Receiver
Gain=N
14 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
4.2.10.3. Menu P3 Depth Seek Correlation coefficient

The depth seek correlation coefficient limit is set with this menu. First
step to the menu by pressing "MENU". Press "+" or "-" to change the
value. Save value by pressing ENTER.
P3 DepthSeekCorr
Limit=R.RRR
4.2.10.4. Menu P4 Depth Seek minimum gradient
The depth seek minimum gradient limit is set with this menu. First step to
the menu by pressing "MENU". Press "+" or "-" to change the value. Save
value by pressing ENTER.
P4 DepthSeekGrad
Thres=R.RRE-RRR
4.2.10.5. Menu P5 Depth track proportional constant
The first order depth track proportional weight is set with this menu. First
P5 DptTrackProp
Const=NNN
4.2.10.6. Menu P6 Depth track derivative constant
The second order depth track derivative weight is set with this menu. First
P6 DptTrackDeriv
Const=NNN
4.2.10.7. Menu P7 DepthTrack
The depth track function is set with this menu. First step to the menu by
pressing ENTER.
P7 DepthTrack
Step Corr
4.2.10.8. Menu P8 DepthTrack timeout
The depth track timeout is set with this menu. The timeout specifies how
long the log continues to measure at a given depth before entering the
search mode. Press "+" or "-" to change the value. Save value by pressing
ENTER.
P8 Depth Track
Timeout=RR.R SEC
15 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
4.2.10.9. Menu P9 BT Signal to noise ratio threshold

The BT signal-to-noise ratio threshold for use of speed sampling is set
with this menu. First step to the menu by pressing "MENU". Press "+" or
"-" to change the value. Save value by pressing ENTER.
P9 BT S/N ratio
Limit=NN.N dB
4.2.10.10. Menu Pa BT T2 algo limit
The BT T2 algo limit is set with this menu. First step to the menu by
pressing ENTER.
PA BTT2AlgoLimit
Thres=RR.RR
4.2.10.11. Menu Pb Bottom Track filter Time Constant
The bottom track time constant is set with this menu. First step to the
menu by pressing "MENU". Press "+" or "-" to change the value. Save
PB BottomTrack
Filter=RRR.RR s
4.2.10.12. Menu Pc Correlation distance constant
The Correlation function averaging distance constant is set with this
menu. First step to the menu by pressing "MENU". Press "+" or "-" to
change the value. Save value by pressing ENTER.
PC CorrAverage
Dist= +RR.RR m
4.2.10.13. Menu Pd First order zero speed threshold
The zero speed threshold is set with this menu. First step to the menu by
pressing ENTER.
PD ZeroSpdThresh
Thres=R.RRRRR
4.2.10.14. Menu Pe 2-dim adaptation weight
The 2-dimensional LMS filter adaptation weight is set with this menu.
First step to the menu by pressing "MENU". Press "+" or "-" to change
the value. Save value by pressing ENTER.
16 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
PE 2-Dimensional
Adapt= NNN
4.2.10.15. Menu Pf 2-dim threshold
The 2-dimensional LMS filter adaptation threshold for slower adaptation
is set with this menu. First step to the menu by pressing "MENU". Press
"+" or "-" to change the value. Save value by pressing ENTER.
PF 2-Dimensional
DualThres=NNNN
4.2.10.16. Menu Pg 2-dim algorithm mode
The 2-dimensional algorithm mode is set with this menu. First step to the
value by pressing ENTER. Value "0" is normal operation. Other values is
for test only.
PG 2-D Algorithm
Mode=NN
4.2.10.17. Menu Ph Echo noise limit
The echo check noise limit is set with this menu. First step to the menu by
pressing ENTER.
PH Echo noise
Limit=RR.R dB
4.2.10.18. Menu Pi 86x feedback gain
The 86x feedback gain is set with this menu. First step to the menu by
pressing ENTER.
PI 86x feedback
Gain=NNN
4.2.10.19. Menu Pj 2-Dimensional Accor Threshold
The 2-dimensional accor threshold is set with this menu. First step to the
PJ 2-Dimensional
AccThres=NNNN
4.2.10.20. Menu Pk Maximum depth
The maximum depth is set with this menu. First step to the menu by
pressing ENTER.
PK Maximum Depth
Limit=NNNN m
17 (23)
Consilium
4.2.11.
Art No. 703258C1
Menu S0 Settings for end user

The setting menus are used to change end user parameters for SAL Tseries log. Ordinary users may set all menus. Press "+" or "-" to select
S0 SETTINGS
WRITE ACCESS OFF
4.2.11.1. Menu S1 PSALX telegram
The proprietary PSALX telegram is enabled with this menu. Press "+" or
"-" to change value. Save selected value by pressing ENTER. The PSALX
message is only used internally in SAL Echo Sounder systems.
S1 PSALX Telegrm
Disabled
4.2.11.2. Menu S2 PSALw telegram
The proprietary PSALw telegram is enabled with this menu. Press "+" or
"-" to change value. Save selected value by pressing ENTER.
S2 PSALw Telegrm
Disabled
4.2.11.3. Menu S3 ALERT telegram
The VDALR telegram used for ALERT signalling is enabled with this
menu. Press "+" or "-" to change value. Save selected value by pressing
ENTER.
S3 ALERT Telegrm
ENABLED
4.2.11.4. Menu S4 Maximum speed magnitude
The maximum speed magnitude is set with this menu. No speed above
this limit is presented. First step to the threshold menu by pressing
"Menu". Press "+" or "-" to change the value. Save value by pressing
ENTER. Speed value cannot be above MAXSPEED.
S4 Max Ahead
Speed=NN knots
4.2.11.5. Menu S6 Lock timeout
The NMEA message transmission timeout for invalid data since last valid
measurement is set with this menu. Press "+" or "-" to change the value.
Time resolution is 1 second. Save selected value by pressing ENTER.
S6 Lock Timeout
Time=NNN seconds
18 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
4.2.11.6. Menu S7 NMEA interval

The NMEA message transmission interval is set with this menu. Press "+"
or "-" to change the value. Time resolution is 0.01 seconds. Save selected
S7 NMEA interval
Time= R.RR sec
4.2.11.7. Menu S9 VBW format
The IEC 61162 /NMEA VBW message version is set with this menu.
Press "+" or "-" to change the format to extended (2nd edition) or short
(earlier version). Save selected value by pressing ENTER.
S9 VBW Format
Extended
4.2.11.8. Menu Sa Operating frequency
The transmission frequency is set with this menu. Press "+" or "-" to
change the value in steps of 500 Hz. Valid frequencies are between
145000 - 155000 Hz. Save selected value by pressing ENTER.
SA OperatingFreq
150000 Hz
4.2.12.
Menu T0 TEST menus

End user and service personnel are intended to use these menus for test.
WARNING: the log stops to operate when any test menu is selected.
Press "+" or "-" to select write or read-only access, ENTER to go into
settings sub menus.
T0 TEST
WRITE ACCESS OFF
4.2.12.1. Menu T1 BT longitudinal Speed simulation
SAL T-series log in speed and depth simulation mode and the output
stream contains NMEA messages with the bottom track longitudinal
speed set to the value on the display. NOTE: Simulation starts when the
menu is accessed. Press "+" or "-" to adjust the speed momentarily,
ENTER to save current simulated speed value.
T1 Simulation
BTLong=RR.RRKN
4.2.12.2. Menu T2 BT transversal Speed simulation
stream contains NMEA messages with the bottom track transversal speed
set to the value on the display. NOTE: Simulation starts when the menu is
accessed. This menu is not available for SAL T1 (one axis) log version.
19 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
Press "+" or "-" to adjust the speed momentarily, ENTER to save current
simulated speed value.
T2 Simulation
BTTrans=RR.RRKN
4.2.12.3. Menu T3 Depth simulation
stream contains NMEA messages with the depth set to the value on the
display. NOTE: Simulation starts when the menu is accessed. Press "+" or
"-" to adjust the depth momentarily, ENTER to save current simulated
depth value.
T3 Simulation
Depth=RRR.RR m
4.2.12.4. Menu T4 Simulation with invalid status
stream contains NMEA messages with the depth and speed set to invalid..
T4 Simulation
D=-- BT=-4.2.13.
Menu V0 VIEW menus

End user and service personnel are intended to use these menus to gather
statistics since last power-on / CPU reset. Press ENTER to go into sub
menus. All menus are read only.
V0 VIEW RECORDED
INFORMATION
4.2.13.1. Menu V1 System up time
System uptime since last power on can be displayed in this menu. First
menu shows total uptime (in days:hours:minutes:seconds format). From
1000 days the seconds are skipped. By pressing + or - the sequence
for information is: total uptime, depth track time, bottom track time and
water track time.
V1 SYSTEM UPTIME
0d:00h:00m:00s
V1 DEPTHTRK TIME
0d:00h:00m:00s
V1 BOTTOMTRKTIME
0d:00h:00m:00s
V1 WATERTRK TIME
0d:00h:00m:00s
20 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
4.2.13.2. Menu V2 SIG

Recorded signal channel levels in dB to check balance direct from depth
measurement. This menu presents the instant and varying channel
balance. Pressing + or - will update the displayed information.
NOTE: Balance should be within 6 dB for a moving vessel within depth
range. A vessel at quay may from time to time give a large unbalance.
This is normal and due to signal statistics.
V2 SIG RR.R RR.R
RR.R RR.R RR.R
4.2.13.3. Menu V3 AVG
Recorded average signal channel levels to check balance from bottom
track measurement. This menu presents the average channel balance in
dB. Pressing + or - updates the displayed information.
NOTE: The information is only updated when the vessel is moving above
2 knots. This makes it possible to inspect the channel balance for a
moving vessel also after docking. Balance should be within 6 dB for a
moving vessel within depth range.
V3 AVG RR.R RR.R
RR.R RR.R RR.R
4.2.13.4. Menu V4 DEPTHSEEK OVF
Recorded count for overflow during depth search. This menu presents the
total count for overflow during depth search.
NOTE: An increasing value is not an error indication. It indicates that
overflow detection is functional.
V4 DEPTHSEEK OVF
0X00000000
4.2.13.5. Menu V5 DEPTH-TRK OVF
Recorded count for overflow during depth track. This menu presents the
total count for overflow during depth track.
V5 DEPTH-TRK OVF
0X00000000
4.2.13.6. Menu V6 DEPTH-TRK HI
Recorded count for high signal during depth track. This menu presents the
total count for high signal during depth track.
signal threshold detection is functional.
V6 DEPTH-TRK HI
0X00000000
21 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
4.2.13.7. Menu V7 DEPTH-TRK LOW

Recorded count for low signal during depth track. This menu presents the
total count for low signal during depth track.
V7 DEPTH-TRK LOW
0X00000000
4.2.13.8. Menu V8 SPEED-TRK OVF
Recorded count for overflow during speed track. This menu presents the
total count for overflow during speed track.
V8 SPEED-TRK OVF
0X00000000
4.2.13.9. Menu V9 SPEED-TRK HI
Recorded count for high signal during speed track. This menu presents
the total count for high signal during speed track.
V9 SPEED-TRK HI
0X00000000
4.2.13.10. Menu Va SPEED-TRK LOW
Recorded count for low signal during speed track. This menu presents the
total count for low signal during speed track.
VA SPEED-TRK LOW
0X00000000
4.2.13.11. Menu Vb SERIAL-IN-ERR
Recorded serial lines decoding errors. This menu presents the total count
for decoding errors during serial input data parsing.
NOTE: An increasing value may indicate poor connections to other
systems.
VB SERIAL-IN-ERR
0X00000000
4.2.13.12. Menu Vc SER-0 ERRORS
Recorded serial port 0 errors. This menu presents the total count for port 0
errors.
VC SER-0 ERRORS
0X00000000
22 (23)
Consilium
Art No. 703258C1
4.2.13.13. Menu Vd SER-1 ERRORS

errors.
VD SER-1 ERRORS
0X00000000
4.2.13.14. Menu Ve SER-2 ERRORS
errors.
VE SER-2 ERRORS
0X00000000
4.2.13.15. Menu Vf SER-3 ERRORS
errors.
VF SER-3 ERRORS
0X00000000
4.2.13.16. Menu Vg DPT-TRK Fails
Recorded depth track failures. This menu presents the total count for
depth track failures.
NOTE: An increasing value is normal and may indicate a rapidly varying
depth profile.
VG DPT-TRK FAILS
0X00000000
4.2.13.17. Menu Vh T2T FAILURES
Recorded transmitter gain failures. This menu presents the number of
failures reported by the transmitter gain supervision circuit.
NOTE: A nonzero value indicates a potential transmitter problem.
VH T2T FAILURES
0X00000000
4.2.13.18. Menu Vi PHA
Cumulative phase roll compensation in Hz.
NOTE: Values beyond 100 Hz are indicated by ++.+ or --.-.. Such
large values indicate a potential hardware problem in the T2R PCB.
VI PHA RR.R RR.R
RR.R RR.R RR.R
23 (23)
Consilium
SAL WTU
Operating Menus
Article No. 702314
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
Abstract: All menus presented by number and explained.
Contents:
1
MENU SYSTEM ...................................................................................................3
WRITE AND READ ONLY ACCESS....................................................................3
USER INTERFACE ..............................................................................................3
FATAL ERRORS ................................................................................................19
Revisions:
Date
2003-04-24
2003-10-15
2004-05-26
Version
A0
A1
A2
Author
STE
JKW/OM
JKW
2005-01-19
B0
JKW
2005-05-24
B1
JKW
2005-10-26
B2
JL
2007-04-26
B3
JL
2007-08-13
2009-01-22
B4
B5
JL
JL
2009-02-05
B6
JL
Comment
Created from 701860D0
Update according to 701860D1
Updated to fit sw 700210b1, approved: JL, OM;
SGU
Correspond to software 700210C0 and later.
Some of the menu is hidden for a normal user.
Updated chapter 3.3.5.3 Menu C3 Multiple
point Calibration to fit the software 700210C0
and later
Added new menu C5 Calibr. RESET for sw
700210D3 and later.
Applies for software 700210D6 and later.
Added new menus M7 and M8 for firmware and
hardware revision. Access level menu is now
M9.
Updated with V-menus in software 700210D7
Updated description to conform to software
700210E1 menus. Editorial changes.
Menu S7, S8 and Sb removed to conform to
actual software.
2 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
1 Menu system
The menu system is controlled through a serial interface connected to a remote display. The
information is presented as two lines with 16 characters. All settings, calibration etc. is
changed through the menu system. Seven key combinations are used:
These keys are used to go to the next menu within the menu
level. Each time the key is pressed, the displayed menu
number is incremented and the next menu is presented.
This key is used to go to the previous menu within the menu
MENU
level. Each time the key is pressed, the menu number
displayed is decreased and the previous menu is presented.
MENU ENTER: This key is used to go up one menu level.
This key is used to step down one level in the menu system.
ENTER:
It is also used to accept and save the setting(s) on the lowest
menu level.
This key is used to increment the chosen value or setting.
+ (Plus)
This key is used to decrement the chosen value or setting.
(Minus)
MENU
MENU +
Please note that both the plus and minus keys can be used to toggle between ON and OFF in
some menus.
If no keys are pressed within 30 seconds, the menu system times out to the normal operation
menu. The only exceptions to this are the test menus and menus Pm, Pn, Pu & Pv.
2 Write and read only access

First level menus include the possibility to select read-only or write access to prevent
accidental change of parameters. Parameters may only be changed when write access is
selected. The write access is active for all submenus within the menu tree, and is reset to read
only access when returning to the top level.
3 User interface
The log starts up and measures speed on its own. The log enters the menu system when a
remote login is made through the serial interface. The information readout depends on mode,
and is described below.
3.1 Initialisation
In the initialisation sequence the software verifies the checksum of the code. This can be seen
on the serial output from the WTU. Timers and hardware is then set-up for normal operation.
The software version can be seen on the serial output from the WTU.
3 (19)
Consilium
3.2
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
Normal operation
The log in normal operation calculates the speed from the sensor signals. The log also
measures signal level from the transducer. The remote display readout uses the following field
descriptors:
MMHXX.XX YY.YY
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
If no valid speed is found the log enters search modes where XX.XX and S=DDDD share the
same position.
Descriptor
Explanation
MM
H
Working mode
Hardware mode
C = Clear water
D = Dirty water
Q = Extra dirty water
Sensed (raw) speed from transducer
Output speed including calibration and time constant averaging.
Field is . if no valid speed is available.
Digital Filter setting. 'F' equals digital filter pre-processing of sample
data, 'R' equals raw sampling, 'L' equals limiter + digital filter.
Normalised correlation coefficient between 0..999, higher coefficient
is better
Normalised signal quality value between 0..999, higher value is
better
first/second channel AGC level [mV]
first/second channel ADConvert levels [bits], see menus D4 & T6
XX.XX
YY.YY / --.-F
C=DDD
S=DDD
ZZZZ:TTTT
UUuu-VVvv
3.2.1 Seek high speed mode

In "Seek-high-speed-mode" the log searches for speed in the upper speed range. It has a
predefined sampling interval and calculates the correlation function corresponding to a number
of discrete speeds. The values for correlation coefficient (C) and signal quality (S) are
presented:
SHC S=DDD YY.YY
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
3.2.2 Locked high speed mode

In "locked-high-speed-mode" the log has locked in on the speed and uses a feedback algorithm
to adjust sampling to track the speed. The display presents the speed in the following format:
LHCXX.XX YY.YY
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
4 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
3.2.3 Seek low speed mode

In "Seek-low-speed-mode" the log seeks for speed in the lower speed range. It has a predefined
speeds. The correlation functions are averaged to improve statistics. The values for correlation
coefficient (C) and signal quality (S) are presented:
SLC S=DDD YY.YY
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
3.2.4 Locked low speed mode

In "Locked-Low-Speed-mode" the log has a predefined sampling interval and calculates the
correlation function corresponding to a number of discrete speeds. Interpolation is used to give
better speed resolution. The display presents speed information in the following format:
LLCXX.XX YY.YY
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
3.2.5 Seek zero speed mode

In "Seek-zero-Speed-mode" the log has a predefined sampling interval and calculates the
correlation functions to estimate the speed range.
During zero speed search the following display information is shown:
SZC 0.00 YY.YY
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
If zero speed is detected (locked) the following display information is shown:
LZC 0.00 YY.YY
FC=DDD ZZZZ:TTTT
3.2.6 Transducer test mode

In "TRU-test-mode" the log measures the AGC level with transmission on and off. The log
repeats measurement of the AGC level for 5 seconds, and the receiver is supposed to have
settled to background level. The display presents speed information in the following format:
T3C TRU SIGNAL
LEVELS ZZZZ:TTTT
3.3 Menu settings

The menus for parameters and internal settings have a two digit alphanumeric field Aa to the
left followed by a menu name or abbreviation on the first line. The second line is reserved for
value or parameter setting. The readout thus looks like:
Aa FUNCTION
VALUE OR SETTING
5 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
When using the menu system the following keys are available:
KEY combination
Explanation
MENU
Go to next menu on the same level
MENU+
Same as MENU
MENU-
Go to previous menu on the same level
MENU ENTER
Return to the above menu level
ENTER
+
Activate menu by executing command or continue on sub

menu level
Increment setting in current menu
Decrement setting in current menu
3.3.1 Menu walk

The keys above can change the current position in the menu tree. Pressing "Menu" steps to the
next menu on the same level. Pressing "Enter" goes down one level, or if at the lowest level
saves current value in non-volatile memory. Pressing "plus" or "minus" changes content for
current menu.
Ex a m p le t o g o fro m N o r m a l o p e r a tio n s to m e n u M 2 :
p r es s M EN U th r ee tim e s fo llo w e d b y EN T ER o n ce , th e n M EN U o n ce m o re .
M EN U
EN T ER
M EN U
EN TE R
M EN U -
N o rm a l
C0
D0
M0
P0
S0
T0
V0
C1
D1
M1
P1
S1
T1
V1
3.3.2 Write and read-only access

All first level menus except menu V0 include the possibility to select read-only or write access
to the menus on the level below. Use "+" or "-" to select write or read-only access before
pressing ENTER to continue on sub menu level. V-menus are always read-only.
Display readout for write access to submenus appears as:
Aa FUNCTION
WRITE ACCESS ON
and the display readout for read-only access appears as:
Aa FUNCTION
WRITE ACCESS OFF
6 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
3.3.3 Saving menu content

When saving menu content by pressing ENTER, the following menu appears for one second:
Aa FUNCTION
SAVE OK
or, when unsuccessful:
Aa FUNCTION
SAVE FAIL
before returning to the normal menu text. If read-only access has been selected, the "no write
access" text appears for one second and the write operation is inhibited:
Aa FUNCTION
NO WRITE ACCESS
3.3.4 Menu function summary

The list is included for fast indexing. Menus in bold font are main menus.
No Name
Default
MM
Timeout to normal operation after 30 seconds. LCD

presentation according to chapter "Normal operation".
Fatal error presented for 2 seconds followed by reset
Selects calibration menus
FULLOAD
Selects predefined draught condition with predefined calibration
factor
0%
Sets calibration factor for draught condition
Unused
Select Multiple Point Calibration Edit/Delete
TC+000
Sets engraved transducer calibration factor
Disable
Reset calibration values
Selects miscellaneous menus
Disable watchdog and timeout to reset
Adjust total distance counter
Reset trip counter
Display the application software revision
Display the PLD firmware revision
Display the PCB hardware revision
All Users:
Only menus with access level All Users
are visible
Authorised Expert: All menus are visible
Selects Settings menus
6
Sets averaging time constant in seconds for low speed range
3.0
Speed limit between low and high averaging time constant.
2
Sets averaging time constant in seconds for high speed range
40
Maximum ahead speed magnitude [kn]
10
Maximum astern speed magnitude [kn]
20
Lock mode timeout when entering search mode [sec]
extended extended with docking log info or short earlier format
Disabled Adds message VHW to NMEA out
FE
C0
C1
(NORMAL
OPERATION)
FATAL ERROR
CALIBRATION
Draught Cond
C2
C3
C4
C5
M0
M2
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
Draught Cal
MultiPointCal
TRU Calibrat
TRU Calibrat
MISCELLANEOUS
CPU Reset
Total Distance
Trip Distance
SW revision
FW revision
HW revision
Access level
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S9
Sa
SETTINGS
Average Low
Thres Low-Hi
Average High
Max Ahead
Max Astern
Lock Timeout
VBW format
VHW Telegram
Function
7 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
No Name
Default
Sc
Analog Speed
Ahead +
Astern
T0
T1
TEST
Simulation
T3
T4
Ta
V0
V1
V2
TRU Passive
TRU Active
LogFail Alarm
VIEW
System Uptime
Speed/no speed
measuring time
Mode
Transitions
Mode dependent
correlation
Speed dependent
correlation
V3
V4
V5
8.00
Art No. 702314B6
Function
Selects Test menus

Put simulated speed as $VDVBW in NMEA output stream and
on pulse output
Transducer test mode (transmit off)
Transducer test mode (transmit on)
Set and clear log fail alarm
Selects menu to view log statistics since last power up
Shows uptime in different modes
Shows time of successful measuring/failed measuring during
speed and zero speed conditions
Shows number of mode transitions between C-D-Q modes
Shows average and maximum correlation in the different modes
Shows average correlation in different speed intervals
3.3.5 Menu C0 Calibration

The calibration menus are used to change calibration parameters for SAL WTU. Ordinary
users may use all menus. Press "+" or "-" to select write access on or off, ENTER to go into
calibration sub menus.
C0 CALIBRATION
WRITE ACCESS OFF
3.3.5.1 Menu C1 Draught condition

Three draught conditions are predefined: FULL LOAD, BALLAST1 and BALLAST2. Menu
selects one draught condition. The draught condition adjusts the output speed with the given
calibration factor. The menu below shows FULL LOAD condition.
C1 Draught Cond
Full LoadRR.RR%
3.3.5.2 Menu C2 Calibrate draught condition

Three draught conditions are predefined: FULL LOAD, BALLAST1 and BALLAST2. First
menu selects one load condition. Selection is adjusted by pressing + or and activated by
pressing ENTER. Selection may be aborted by pressing "MENU ENTER".
C2 Draught Cal
Set Factor
Pressing "Enter" enables the user to change draught condition.
C2 Draught Cal
Full Load +0.00%
Press "menu" to select load condition. The calibration value RR.RR% is adjusted by
pressing "+" or "" and saved by pressing ENTER.
8 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
C2 Draught Cal
Ballast1 RR.RR%
3.3.5.3 Menu C3 Multiple point Calibration

3.3.5.3.1 Procedure to set new multiple points
1. Move to menu C3 (if not ENABLED, change to ENABLED (+))

C3 Multi-P Cal
Enabled
2. Move down (with Enter) to C3.01.
C3.01 MULTI-P 1
Unused Point
if no values are set, or
C3.01 MULTI-P 1
10.00KN 23.45%
if 23.45% correction at 10knots was previously set
3. If needed change to next point by pressing Menu
4. Press Enter
5. Use + and to set which speed to be calibrated for (expected) at that point (i.e. the
speed used at the calibration run).
C3.01 MULTI-P 1
Expected 10.00KN
6. Save by pressing Enter
7. Use + and to change the calculated calibration factor for that speed
C3.01 MULTI-P 1
10.00KN 23.45%
8. Save by pressing Enter
C3.01 MULTI-P 1
SAVED OK
9 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
3.3.5.3.2 Procedure to delete multiple points
1. Move to menu C3 (if not DISABLED, change to DISABLED (-))

C3 Multi-P Cal
Disabled
2. Move down (with Enter) to C3.01.
C3.01 MULTI-P 1
10.00KN 23.45%
3. If needed change to next point by pressing Menu
4. Press Enter
C3.01 MULTI-P 1
DELETE POINT
5. Press Enter to confirm deletion
C3.01 MULTI-P 1
Unused Point
Note:
If ENABLED is selected the multiple point calibration is active

If DISABLED is selected the multiple point calibration is inactive
3.3.5.4 Menu C4 TRU Calibration

The transducer (TRU) calibration is set with this menu. Press "+" or "-" to change the TC
value to correspond to the engraved marking on the transducer housing. Save value by
pressing ENTER. Example TC+123 means calibration factor +1.23%, TC101 means
calibration factor 1.01%.
C4 TRU Calibrat.
Marking: TCNNN
3.3.5.5 Menu C5 Reset Calibration Values

This menu is used to reset calibration values.
The following menu is presented when write access is off and no reset is possible to perform:
C5 Calibr. RESET
WRITE ACCESS OFF
The following menu is presented when write access is on.
C5 Calibr. RESET
Disabled
Press + to enable reset:
C5 Calibr. RESET
Enabled
10 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
Press ENTER to activate reset. All calibration values will be reset to 0.

Note! There is no way to restore old values after reset so write down old values prior to reset.
3.3.6 Menu M0 Miscellaneous menus
The menu M1 restores all parameters in the SAL WTU to default value. Press "+" or "-" to
select write or read-only access, ENTER to go into settings sub menus.
M0 MISCELLANEOUS
WRITE ACCESS OFF
3.3.6.1 Menu M2 CPU RESET

The following menu is presented when write access is off and no reset is possible to perform:
M2 CPU Reset
NO WRITE ACCESS
The following menu is presented when write access is on.
M2 CPU Reset
Disabled
Press + to enable reset:
M2 CPU Reset
Enabled
Press ENTER to activate reset. This menu stores total distance counter and activates the
watchdog circuitry and thus timeouts the SAL WTU to reset.
3.3.6.2 Menu M4 Total Distance counter
The total distance counter is adjusted with this menu. Press "+" or "-" to change the value.
Save value by pressing ENTER. NOTE: the distance counter values are sent as $VDVLW
message on the serial output.
M4 TotalDistance
Dist=RRRRR.RRNM
3.3.6.3 Menu M5 Trip Distance counter

The trip distance counter is reset with this menu. Reset value by pressing ENTER. NOTE: the
distance counter values are sent as $VDVLW message on the serial output.
M5 Trip Distance
Dist= RRRR.RRNM
3.3.6.4 Menu M6 SW revision

Get the application software revision.
M6 SW revision
Rev 700210XX
11 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
3.3.6.5 Menu M7 FW revision

Get the PLD firmware revision.
M7 FW revision
Rev 7002008XX
3.3.6.6 Menu M8 HW revision

Get the PCB hardware revision.
M6 HW revision
Rev 700200X
3.3.6.7 Menu M9 Access Level

Change access level for some menus. Step to the access level menu by pressing "Menu". Press
"+" or "-" to select access level. Press ENTER to save value.
Note:
All Users: Some menus are locked

Authorised Expert: No menus are locked
3.3.7 Menu S0 Settings for end user

The setting menus are used to change end user parameters for SAL WTU. Ordinary users may
set all menus. Press "+" or "-" to select write or read-only access, ENTER to go into settings
sub menus.
S0 SETTINGS
WRITE ACCESS OFF
3.3.7.1 Menu S1 Average low

The time constant for averaging in the low speed range is set with this menu. Press "+" or "-"
to change the value. Save value by pressing ENTER.
S1 Average Low
Time=NN seconds
3.3.7.2 Menu S2 Threshold low-high

The speed threshold for averaging between the low and high-speed ranges is set with this
menu. Press "+" or "-" to change the value. Save value by pressing ENTER.
S2 Thres Low-Hi
Threshold=RR.RKN
12 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
3.3.7.3 Menu S3 Average high

The time constant for averaging in the high-speed range is set with this menu. Press "+" or "-"
S3 Average High
Time=NN seconds
3.3.7.4 Menu S4 Maximum ahead speed magnitude

The maximum ahead speed magnitude is set with this menu. If the log measures an ahead
speed above this limit, it enters fatal error condition. Press "+" or "-" to change the value. Save
value by pressing ENTER. Speed value cannot be above MAXSPEED.
S4 Max Ahead
Speed=NN knots
3.3.7.5 Menu S5 Maximum astern speed magnitude

The maximum astern speed magnitude is set with this menu. If the log measures an astern
speed above this limit, it enters fatal error condition. Press "+" or "-" to change the value. Save
value by pressing ENTER. Speed value cannot be above MAXSPEED.
S5 Max Astern
Speed=NN knots
3.3.7.6 Menu S6 Lock Timeout

The timeout sets maximum time since last valid measurement. If no valid speed has been
found within the timeout, the log sends unvalid speed in nmea output stream. Press "+" or "-"
S6 Lock Timeout
Time=NNN seconds
3.3.7.7 Menu S9 NMEA VBW format

The NMEA message VBW format is set with this menu. Press "+" or "-" to change between
extended with docking log information fields (according to IEC61162-1 2nd edition), or short
format (according to earlier edition). Save value by pressing ENTER.
S9 VBW Format
Extended
3.3.7.8 Menu Sa NMEA VHW Telegram

The NMEA message VHW is added using this menu. Press "+" or "-" to change between
Disabled or Enabled. Save value by pressing ENTER.
Sa VHW Telegram
Disabled
13 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
3.3.7.9 Menu Sc Analog Speed

Set analog speed output mode. Press "+" or "-" to change the value. Save value by pressing
ENTER.
Sc Analog Speed
Ahead + Astern
3.3.8 Menu T0 TEST menus

End user and service personnel are intended to use these menus for test. WARNING! The log
stops to operate when any test menu is selected. Press "+" or "-" to select write or read-only
access, ENTER to go into settings sub menus.
T0 TEST
WRITE ACCESS OFF
3.3.8.1 Menu T1 Speed simulation

WARNING! The log stops to operate when in this mode. This menu sets WTU in speed
simulation mode and the output stream contains NMEA messages with the water track speed
set to the value selected on the display. For the RSC860B board, the pulse speed output is also
simulated. NOTE: Simulation starts when the menu is accessed. Press "+" or "-" to adjust the
speed momentarily, ENTER to save current simulated speed value.
T1 Simulation
Speed=RR.RRKN
3.3.8.2 Menu T3 TRU signal TEST

This mode is intended for production test. WARNING! The log stops to operate when entering
this mode. This menu disables the transmitter and sets WTU in Automatic Gain Control test
mode. Sampling is repeated all the time and the log stops measuring speed, and only reports
the current AGC level.
T3 TRU PASSIVE
LEVELS ZZZZ:TTTT
This test may also be active in normal operation by software control. The transmit pulse is first
activated to get the AGC echo level, then transmission is inhibited and the settling to the
background level is seen on the display. Settling is stopped after 10 seconds, and the log
returns to normal operation. The display presents transducer test as:
T3 TRU SIGNAL
LEVELS ZZZZ:TTTT
and normal test result as:
T3 TRU SIGNAL
LEVELS NORMAL
14 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
If signal levels are (too) low (and the transducer may be damaged or not connected) as:
T3 TRU SIGNAL
LEVELS LOW
3.3.8.3 Menu T4 TRU signal TEST

This mode is intended for production test. WARNING! The log stops to operate when entering
this mode. This menu enables the transmitter and sets WTU in Automatic Gain Control test
mode. Sampling is repeated all the time and the log stops measuring speed, and only reports
the current AGC level.
T4 TRU ACTIVE
LEVELS ZZZZ:TTTT
3.3.8.4 Menu Ta LogFail Alarm

Set and clear log fail alarm. Press "+" or "-" to change the value. Save value by pressing
ENTER.
Ta LogFail Alarm
FAIL
3.3.9 Menu V0 View menus

End user and service personnel are intended to use these menus to gather statistics since last
power-on. Press ENTER to go into sub menus. All menus are read only.
V0 VIEW RECORDED
INFORMATION
3.3.9.1 Menu V1 System uptime

System uptime since last power on can be displayed in this menu. First menu shows total
uptime (in days:hours:minutes:seconds format). By pressing + or -, uptimes in different
modes can be displayed. The following choices can be made, total uptime, uptime in zero
speed mode, uptime in search mode, uptime in C-mode, uptime in D-mode and uptime in Qmode.
V1 System Uptime
00d:00h:00m:00s
V1 Zero Speed
00d:00h:00m:00s
V1 Search time
00d:00h:00m:00s
15 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
V1 C-Mode Uptime
00d:00h:00m:00s
V1 D-Mode Uptime
00d:00h:00m:00s
V1 Q-Mode Uptime
00d:00h:00m:00s
3.3.9.2 Menu V2 Speed related execution time

Menu V2 shows execution time spent as valid speed, maximum consecutive time without
speed, average consecutive time without speed and total number of times without speed. Same
information is also available for zero speed.
V2 Valid Speed
00d:00h:00m:00s
V2 Max no Speed
00d:00h:00m:00s
V2 Aver no Speed
00d:00h:00m:00s
V2 Speed loss
Count = 0
V2 Valid Zero
00d:00h:00m:00s
V2 Max no Zero
00d:00h:00m:00s
V2 Aver no Zero
00d:00h:00m:00s
V2 Zero loss
Count = 0
16 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
3.3.9.3 Menu V3 Mode transitions

Menu V3 shows number of transitions between C,D and Q-mode in 10-minutes intervals. The
average, minimum and maximum number of transitions per 10-minutes can be displayed.
V3 AVR MIN MAX
C-D
0
0
0
V3 AVR MIN MAX
D-C
0
0
0
V3 AVR MIN MAX
D-Q
0
0
0
V3 AVR MIN MAX
Q-D
0
0
0
V3 AVR MIN MAX
Q-C
0
0
0
3.3.9.4 Menu V4 Mode dependent correlation values

Menu V4 shows average and maximum correlation obtained in the three different modes C, D
and Q.
V4 CORR= AVR MAX
C-MODE
0
0
V4 CORR= AVR MAX
D-MODE
0
0
V4 CORR= AVR MAX
Q-MODE
0
0
3.3.9.5 Menu V5 Speed dependent correlation values

Menu V4 shows average correlation obtained in 3knots speed intervals from 0 to 36+knots.
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
0- 3
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
3- 6
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
6- 9
17 (19)
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
9-12
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
12-15
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
15-18
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
18-21
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
21-24
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
24-27
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
27-30
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
30-33
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
33-36
V5 CORR AT SPEED
0
36 +
18 (19)
Art No. 702314B6
Consilium
SAL WTU Menus
Art No. 702314B6
4 Fatal errors
If the log encounters a fatal error condition, it stops normal execution, send a $VDTXT serial
message and displays a fatal error on the display. The second line is reserved for the error
description. The log will enter reset within a two-second timeout.
FE FATAL ERROR
ERRORCODE-------
Fatal error descriptions are found in the table below.

ERRORCODE
Explanation
ADC_Convert: Channel num

Err
Wrong argument to AD converter
NMEALIB Err
Message coding error
LCD size Err
Display printout argument too large
SERIO? Error
Serial io error
Overrun Error
Serial io error
SPEED too high
Ahead speed above MAXAHEAD.
SPEED too low
Astern speed above MAXASTERN.
SAMPLING OVERRUN
Sampling routine error.
EEPROM FAIL
E2P routine error.
19 (19)
Consilium
SAL
T-Series
Harbour Acceptance
Test
Article No. 703254
Consilium
Harbour Acceptance Test
Art No. 703254D1
Harbour Acceptance test. Main Electronics Unit (ELC), Transducer

(TRU) and optional Log Processing Unit (LPU)
Contents
1.
Scope
2.
Equipment needed
3.
Test procedure for TRU
4.
Test procedure for STW
5.
Test procedure for SOG
6.
Test procedure for optional LPU2
7.
Final inspection
8.
Protocol
Revisions:
Date
2002-04-04
2002-07-10
2002-10-31
2004-01-16
2005-10-31
2008-02-12
2010-05-21
Ver
A0
A1
A2
A3
B0
D0
D1
Iss by
JXA
STE
HW
OM
OM
RB
OM
Description
Updated BT test
Cable to be checked for damages
Change from 860 to T-series
Change to T2M with internal BT transmitter
Adapted to LPU2
Company name, deleted LCD on WTU, BT/WTSTW/SOG
2 (10)
Consilium
1.
Art No. 703254D1
Scope
This document describes the Harbour Acceptance Test (HAT) for SAL T-series speed
log. The HAT for SAL T-series tests the electronics unit (ELC), the transducer (TRU),
the optional Log Processing Unit (LPU2) and their interaction. The ELC contains a
Water Track SAL WTU PCB unit (which measures speed through the water) and a SAL
T2 BTU Bottom Track PCB unit (which measures speed over the ground). This
document contains a list of equipment needed, test procedures and a prepared test
protocol.
2.
Equipment needed
In addition to the ELC and TRU under test, the following equipment is needed:
Calibrated DMM for measurement of VAC, VDC, ohm and frequency.
This HAT instruction, including an additional copy of the protocol pages.
NMEA test equipment for monitoring the serial NMEA 0183 communication (such
as terminal-emulating PC).
Technical Document 700164 for NMEA message description.
3.
Test procedure for TRU
Refer to protocol on page 7!

Verify the serial number of the transducer.
Verify that the transducer is correctly positioned and aligned according to the
installation manual.
Measure the defined resistance values of the TRU and write down the result in the
protocol.
Verify that the cable is of original length, has not been cut and is without any visual
damages.
Connect the TRU cable to SAL T2M unit. Ensure that the red and blue earth
connections are connected to the ground bolt (M5) in the ELC .
Verify that the TRU cable shield is firmly connected in the cable gland in the bottom
of the ELC case.
4.
Test procedure for STW

Verify the serial number of the WTU unit.
Connect mains supply voltage.
Verify the SW version and Bootcode version at start-up on a hyper terminal.
3 (10)
Consilium
Art No. 703254D1
Test the EEPROM by entering a new value in the speed simulation menu. Press
MENU six times until LCD presents "T0 TEST WRITE ACCESS OFF". Press "+" to
have "T0 TEST WRITE ACCESS ON". Press "ENTER" to enter dummy speed
simulation. Press "+" once to get "T1 Simulation Speed = +8.01 KN". Press
"ENTER" to store value and wait for "SAVE OK" on second LCD line. Press "-"
once to get "T1 Simulation Speed = +8.00 KN". Press "ENTER" to restore default
value and wait for "SAVE OK" on second LCD line. Exit simulation mode by
simultaneously pressing "MENU" and "ENTER" twice.
5.
Test procedure for SOG
The test is divided into the following tests: first the Power Supply Unit (PSU) is tested,
then the PCB unit, and finally the whole Bottom Track system.
Verify the serial number and revision of the SAL T-serie ELC unit.
Verify the serial number and revision of the T2M pcb.
Verify main transformer primary connection according to ships power supply,
230VAC or 115VAC
Verify backup transformer primary connection if the ELC is equipped with two
transformers.
Check mains supply voltage and if applicable the backup supply.
Check mains supply frequency and if applicable the backup supply.
Connect terminal emulating software to the NMEA output.
Check T2F regulated voltages.
Connect mains supply voltage.
If the ELC is equipped with two transformers, connect backup power supply.
Watch the serial messages of the T2R during the start-up sequence and verify the SW
version.
6.

Note revision and serial number of ELC and the three PCB in the protocol.
Connect power to the LPU2 and use the SD4 Master Display to access the menu
system in the LPU2.
Revision of software and firmware can be inspected via the menu system (M8 and
M9). Verify that this identity corresponds to the version defined in the scope of
delivery. Note the revision of software and firmware in the protocol.
Use the manual to set up the LPU2 via the SD4 master display. Program inputs and
outputs according to customer demand. Set options according to customer demand.
Actual speed and depth values from the speed log can be viewed on the start menu of
the LPU2. The next tests verify that the connection between the SAL T-series speed
log ELC and the LPU2 is correct.
4 (10)
Consilium
Art No. 703254D1
Set the SOG part of the speed log in speed simulation (menu T1
BTLONG=+08.0KN, menu T2 BTTRANS = +0.08KN and menu T3 DEPTH=
80.0M. Check that the correct values are displayed in the start menu of the LPU2.
Check that the NMEA-message has correct value and sign and corresponds with the
NMEA standard $VDVBW message as defined in Technical Document 700164.
Verify that all SD4 indicators and external users of LPU2 information receive the
simulated speed and depth (NMEA, pulse and analogue users).
Restore the SOG speed log to normal operation. If the depth below the hull is at least
2 metres, the SOG log shall lock to the depth. The STW log will start its ``scanning
sequence to search for a valid speed.
7.
Final inspection
When the ELC and TRU have passed all tests the protocol is signed with signature
and date on the summary page 6. One copy of the completed protocol (pp 610) shall
be returned to Consilium Marine & Safety for reference purpose.
5 (10)
Consilium
8.
Art No. 703254D1
Protocol
Harbour Acceptance Test for SAL T-Series system, Summary

SAL T-Series Log System
Owner:
Yard:
Ship:
Type:
TRU
ELC
LPU
Gyro
Indicators:
Order#:
Comment
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
Status:
Comments: ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
Passed
/ Failed
Date:
______________________
Sign: ________________________
(Consilium)
Date:
______________________
Sign: ________________________
(Customer, if applicable)
6 (10)
Consilium
Art No. 703254D1
Harbour Acceptance Test for SAL T-series

TRU S/N:
Order#:
Comment
Water track DC test
[ohm]
Type values below
1=>2
4=>5
1=>3
4=>3
1=>4
Bottom track DC test
Resistance [ohm]
38=>39:
41=>42:
44=>45:
47=>48:
50=>51:
53=>54:
Cable check:
Status:
1.82.6 ohms
1.82.6 ohms
> 20 Mohms
> 20 Mohms
> 20 Mohms
Resistance to GND (Red)
[ohm]
Isolation to GND (Red) > 20

Mohm
37:
40:
43:
46:
49:
52:
GND (Blue):
Damages, Yes
38:
41:
44:
47:
50:
53:
7 (10)
/No
Cut, Yes
/No
Consilium
Art No. 703254D1

Water Track
WTU PCB Unit
WTU software version
ELC
EPROM Read/Write
Status:
Order#:
U/N:
Boot:
Test result
Comment
S/N:
Flash:
SAVE OK
8 (10)
Consilium
Art No. 703254D1

Bottom Track
ELC sn:
T2M:
Main transformer
connection primary:
Power input voltage
Main
Power input frequency
Main
Backup transformer
connection primary
Power input voltage
Backup
Power input frequency
Backup
T2F:
Vcc: + 5 Vdc
+12 Vdc
- 12 Vdc
Int +5 Vdc
Int - 5 Vdc
T2R:
SW boot OK?
T3+ Additional T2R:
Status:
Order#:
Comment
U/N:
S/N:
115VAC or 230VAC
L1-L2:
Tol: 198 .. 253 VAC or
L1-L2:
Tol 47 .. 63 Hz
115VAC or 230VAC
L1-L2:
Tol: 198 .. 253 VAC or
L1-L2:
Tol 47 .. 63 Hz
U/N:
P5-P10:
P4-P10:
P6-P10:
P8-P10:
P9-P10:
U/N:
S/N:
Tol: 4.85 .. 5.25VDC
Tol: 11.6 .. 12.4 VDC
Tol: -11.6 .. -12.4 VDC
Tol: 4.85 .. 5.25VDC
Tol: -4.85 .. -5.25VDC
S/N:
U/N:
S/N:
9 (10)
Consilium
Art No. 703254D1

LPU2 (Optional)
Identity LPU2 ELC
Identity CPU-PCB
Identity IO-PCB
Identity PSU-PCB
Software
Firmware
Output programming
Display of Simulated speed
and depth on LPU2.
NMEA Syntax OK
SD4 indicators and external
listeners receive correct
data
Status:
U/N: 704500 rev:

U/N: 704550 rev:
(Menu M10)
U/N: 704560 rev:
U/N: 704570 rev:
U/N: 704519 rev:
U/N: 704517 rev:
10 (10)
Comment
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
Menu M8
Menu M9
According to user demand
Correct speed and depth on
LPU2 start menu
According to 700164
All users receive correct
values?
Consilium
SAL
T-series
Calibration and Sea
Acceptance Test
Article No. 703255
Consilium
Calibration and Sea Acceptance test
Art No. 703255D2
SAL T-Series
Calibration and Sea Acceptance test. Main Electronics Unit (ELC), Transducer
(TRU) and optional Log Processing Unit 2nd generation (LPU2)
Contents
1.
Scope
2.
Equipment needed
3.
Test procedure for bottom track (ground speed)
3.1.
SOG Transducer angle calibration................................................................................... 4
3.2. Speed Calibration (SOG) ........................................................................................................ 5

3.3.
SOG T3+ system with two T2R PCB .............................................................................. 6
3.4.
The boundary layer .......................................................................................................... 7
3.5.
Calibration factors STW .................................................................................................. 7

3.5.1.
3.5.2.
3.5.3.
4.
TRU Calibration ............................................................................................... 8

Draught calibration (Single point calibration) .................................................. 8
Speed Depending Calibration (Multiple Point Calibration)............................ 10

4.1.
12
System signal flow......................................................................................................... 12
5.
Final inspection
12
6.
SAT protocol
13
7.
Protocol Multiple point calibration
15
8.
16
Copy for Consilium Marine & Safety AB.................................................................................... 16
2 (16)
Consilium
Revisions:
Date
2002-04-04
2002-08-19
2004-01-19
2005-05-18
Ver
A0
A1
A2
B0
Iss by
JXA
STE
OM
JKW
2008-02-12
2008-08-05
2010-05-21
D0
D1
D2
RB
OM
OM
Art No. 703255D2
Description
Created from 702907C3
updated BT procedure and protocols
Update to T-Series
Update to fit new input of calibration points for
WTU rev C0 or greater.
Deleted LPU and adapted to LPU2
T3+, set parameters in second T2R
BT/WT-SOG/STW, Company name
3 (16)
Consilium
1.
Art No. 703255D2
Scope
This document describes the Calibration procedures and also serves as a Sea Acceptance test (SAT)
for SAL T-Series speed log systems such as, SAL T2 and SAL T3 systems. The SAT for SAL TSeries is used to verify that the system works, and to calibrate the log. The document contains a list of
equipment needed, how to perform the test and a test protocol.
To aid future customer support, it is necessary that two sets of the protocol pages are filled-in. One set
should be returned to Consilium Marine & Safety AB, Navigation division, After Sales Department
and the other set should be left in the reference manual on board the ship.
2.
Equipment needed
In addition to the log system, the following equipment is needed:

The log system must have a Speed Log Master Display such as an SD4-2 with two-way
communication to access the different menu systems.
Display unit for speed and distance indication (such as SD4-2). The Speed Log Master Display
can be used.
This SAT instruction and the SAT instruction for the STW part (WTU).
For the STW log calibration a test site is needed, where accurate distance and speed trials can
be made.
A reference positioning system if the speed over the ground log is to be calibrated. Note!
Calibration of the SOG log is hard to perform and is normally not done on merchant ships. If
DGPS is used as positioning system, always compare it with BTR distance, bottom track
resulting distance, and the SOG log must be within depth range and indicate speed for the total
distance accumulation.
3.
Test procedure for bottom track (ground speed)
Ensure that the bottom track log locks on bottom within measurement range and indicate speed.
3.1. SOG Transducer angle calibration

If the SOG shows a transversal speed bias (= the transversal distance trip counter accumulates false
distance) when no drift is present, the transducer alignment may be adjusted. There are two ways to
compensate for the transducer angle.
We strongly recommend the method in which the transducer is mechanically accurately aligned by test
runs.
If this is not possible, there is also an alternative way to compensate the angle in software by adjusting
the calibration angle.
4 (16)
Consilium
Art No. 703255D2
To align the transducer represents an even harder problem in finding accurate enough reference
systems. In some installations, where two axis speed is fed to an integrated navigation system together
with accurate gyro data, the two-dimensional dead reckoning performed by the navigation computer
can be directly compared with other position data and the angular error produced by the log can be
calculated directly or indirectly.
For most installations. however, this is not possible, and the following procedure is proposed:
a) Place the ship on a straight course directly against current and wind so that the true transversal
motion of the ship is zero.
b) Read the transversal speed output of the log as the same time as the transducer is accessible (the
transversal speed can for instance be read on an NMEA output of the Log Electronics Unit).
c) Trim the transducer angle until the transversal speed reading fluctuations are centred around zero.
(this is described in the section Installation of transducer and bottom parts.)
Where it is necessary to perform a software calibration of the transducer angle, some reference system
to establish the desired correction angle must be used. The accuracy of this system must be verified.
The following formula can be used:
NEW = OLD + measured - reference ,
where reference is the direction of movement (referenced to the keel line) obtained from the reference
system and measured is the same direction obtained from the log during the trial run. The angular
values for both reference system and log output can be found using the relationship:
= arctan (Dt / Dl),
where Dt is the transversal distance (or speed) component and Dl is the longitudinal component.
The angular correction entered on the thumbwheel switches are represented in 0.1 steps, using
menu C2 in SAL T2.
3.2. Speed Calibration (SOG)

It is possible to calibrate the speed value with a correction factor in 0.01% increments.
However, for most installations, where the transducer is installed exactly vertical and where normal
reference systems, like DGPS or other electronic navigation systems, are used it is not
necessary/possible to get improved performance by calibrating the log.
If good enough reference data are possible to obtain, the calibration value to be set in the system can
be calculated using the following formula:
5 (16)
Consilium
Art No. 703255D2
BScaleNEW = BScaleOLD x Dexpected / Dsensed

where BScaleNEW is the new absolute value and BScaleOLD is the old value that was set during the
distance run. Note that values in the menu system are relative in percent and the formula uses absolute
values.
Example: Old value was 0.00%, expected distance was 2.01 NM and the sensed distance was 1.99
NM. The new distance is then:
BScaleNEW = (1+0/100) x 2.01 / 1.99 =1.0100
Calibration factor =(BScaleNEW-1.0) x 100 = +1.00%
It should be noted that accuracy of the distance obtained as reference must be verified against defined
performance of used reference system. It should also be noted that if reference distance is used, the
distance measured by the log system for comparison must be taken from the distance counter of an
indicator being set to show resulting SOG or could be obtained from longitudinal and transversal trip
distance counters being added geometrically.
The calibration correction values entered are represented in 0.01% increments in the menu C1 in SAL
T2.
3.3. SOG T3+ system with two T2R PCB

In case of a T3+ system there are two T2R PCB in the ELC. If any parameter needs to be changed in
this system special care must be taken to ensure that also the parameter in the 2nd T2R PCB is
changed. The menu system in the first T2R (remote id T2A) PCB is accessed via the Speed Log
Master Display.
To establish communication with the second T2R (remote id T2B) via the Speed Log Master Display.
it is necessary to first suspend serial data transmission from the first T2R PCB as described in the SD4
chapter in this manual.
A PC running SD4Com software can also be directly connected to the RS232 comport on each T2R
PCB in the ELC for setting parameters.
6 (16)
Consilium
Art No. 703255D2
3.3.1. Test procedure for the STW unit, WTU PCB.
3.4. The boundary layer

The water moves slower close to the hull than it does further away. The layer with lower speed is
called the boundary layer, see figure 1.
Ships hull
Ships
Speed

water speed = 0
Inside
Boundary
Layer


0
Figure A Boundary layer speed distribution.

The WTU PCB, Water Track Unit, measures speed close to the hull, and may thus measure a lower
speed. When the ship is in shallow waters, the boundary layer may be different from normal. This
physical effect will affect all logs measuring relative speed.
3.5. Calibration factors STW

The SAL STW part (WTU) has three different methods for calibrating the speed.
TRU calibration - a fix calibration factor (marked on the TRU and the TRU-cable)
compensating small differences in characteristics of individual transducers. To be set at the
speed log set-up at installation and when changing TRU only.
Draught calibration a single point calibration factor compensating differences in indicated
speed, due to load and trim of the ship. Three different preset draught conditions can be
programmed. They are named: FULL LOAD, BALLAST 1 and BALLAST 2.
Speed depending calibration - multiple point calibration factors compensating differences in
indicated speed over the whole speed range. Factors can be preset for up to ten different
speeds. Speeds between the calibrated points are interpolated automatically.
7 (16)
Consilium
Art No. 703255D2
Note: The minimum necessary calibrations to be set are the TRU-calibration plus at least one of the
draught calibrations. If so, after setting the TRU-calibration, chose e.g. FULL LOAD and compensate
for the normal cruising speed used at normal load conditions (se below)
Draught Calibration and Speed Depending Calibration shall normally not be used at the same time.
3.5.1.
TRU Calibration
This type of calibration is compensating small differences in characteristics of individual transducers.

The transducer has been independently calibrated in factory and its compensator factor must be
programmed in-to the speed log it is connected to. The factor is engraved on the transducer housing as
TC000. It is also labelled at the termination end of the TRU-cable. Example: TC+123 means
calibration factor +1,23% and TC-101 means calibration factor 1,01%.
Note: The TRU Calibration shall be set to its value before any other calibration is performed.
Procedure:
Go in to the Menu System; step to R0 REMOTE DEV and then down to WTU sub menu C0. Chose
WRITE ACCESS ON (+) and proceed down to menu C4.
C4 TRU CALIBRAT.
MARKING: TC000
Change the value by using the +/- buttons and then save the value by pressing Enter.
Leave the WTU menu and the Menu System and return to the normal Trip/Total mode by pressing
ESC three times.
3.5.2.
Draught calibration (Single point calibration)
This type of calibration is meant for merchant vessels where the water flow around the hull is
changing due to different draughts and trims. Three calibrations can be performed for cruising speeds
relevant to each of three decided draught/load conditions (FULL LOAD or BALLAST 1 or BALLAST
2). These calibrations are compensating with the same calibration percentage, respectively, over the
whole speed register.
Changing between the three draught/load calibration types can then be done later in menu R0-C1 by
pressing plus (+) or minus (-) without changing the write access in menu C0. However the change
must be saved by pressing the ENTER button.
Before the calibration runs, make sure:
that correct TRU-calibration factor is set (see above)
that the desired draught condition is chosen and set to 0% (Menus RO- C1 /C2)
the Multi Point Calibration is DISABLED (Menu RO- C3)
8 (16)
Consilium
Art No. 703255D2
The system is calibrated by sailing a true, known distance in calm waters. To eliminate variations
caused by tide, current and wind, the ship should run the same route in both directions. For each
separate run, carefully observe beginning and end of the true sailed distance and corresponding
measured distance on log display. Then, for each speed, do following calculation to find the
calibration factor CF:
CF=[(expected dist.1 + expected dist.2 ) / (measured dist.1 + measured dist.2)]
Normally the true distance is based on optical observations, but it is also possible to use other
reference systems like DGPS or similar. If the calibration factor is based on a very long (several hours
or days) comparison with GPS observations, make sure that it has not been affected by wind and
current.
Use the menu system to enter the calibration factor in menu RO- C2. Note that the correlation shall be
expressed in percentage. A calculated value of e.g. 1.234 shall be entered as 23.40%.
Procedure: (see 4.4 above for how to move in the menu system)
1. Go in to the Menu System, step to R0 REMOTE DEV and then down to WTU sub menu C0
C0 CALIBRATION
WRITE ACCESS OFF
2. chose WRITE ACCESS ON (+)
3. move down to menu C1 and check that desired alternative is chosen (see above)
C1 DRAUGHT COND
FULL LOAD 0,00%
4. move to C2 and press Enter
5. use + and to change to calculated value from the calibration runs (e.g. 23.40%)
C2 DRAUGHT CAL
FULL LOAD +23,40%
6. save by pressing enter
7. leave the WTU menu and the Menu System and return to the normal Trip/Total mode by
pressing ESC three times
Repeat the procedure (2-6) for each draught condition if desired.
9 (16)
Consilium
3.5.3.
Art No. 703255D2
Speed Depending Calibration (Multiple Point Calibration)
This type of calibration is meant for vessels needing varying speed compensation in the whole speed
register. Up to ten different speeds can be calibrated for, spread to speeds both ahead and astern.
Speeds between the calibration points are interpolated automatically, except the area nearest zero,
which uses its nearest calibration factor down (up) to speed zero.
The Multiple Point Calibration can be ENABLED and DISABLED in menu R0-C3 without changing
the write access rights in Menu C0. However the change must be stored by pressing the ENTER
button.
Make the calibration runs and calculations as described above for Single Point Calibration, but now
repeat the procedure for each speed desired.
Before the calibration runs, make sure
that correct TRU-calibration factor is set (see above)
that the chosen draught condition (e.g. BALLAST 1) is set to 0% (Menus R0- C1 and C2)
that the Multi Point Calibration is DISABLED (Menu R0-C3)
Due to the interpolation between the compensation factors the Multi Point Calibration must be
DISABLED during all calibration runs, also when making a later run for an extra calibration point.
Procedure to set new multiple points: (see 4.4 above for how to move in the menu system)
C0 CALIBRATION
WRITE ACCESS OFF
3. move to menu C3 and change to ENABLED (+)
C3 MULTI-P CAL
ENABLED
4. move down (with Enter) to C3.01.
C3,01 MULTI-P 1
UNUSED POINT
(if no values are set, and e.g.:)
C3.01 MULTI-P 1
10,0 KN 23,45 %
(if values are set before)
5. if needed change to next point by pressing Menu

6. press Enter
10 (16)
Consilium
Art No. 703255D2
7. use + and to set which speed to be calibrated for (expected) at that point (i.e. the speed used
at the calibration run).
C3.01 MULTI-P
EXPECTED 0.00 KN
8. save by pressing Enter
9. use + and to change the calculated calibration factor for that speed
C3.01 MULTI-P 1
10,0 KN 0,00 %
10. save by pressing Enter
11. change to next point by pressing Menu and repeat from 6.
12. leave the WTU menu and the Menu System and return to the normal Trip/Total mode by
pressing ESC three times
Repeat the procedure (2-6) for each draught condition if desired.
Procedure to delete multiple points: (see 4.4 above for how to move in the menu system)
C0 CALIBRATION
WRITE ACCESS OFF
3. move to menu C3 and change to DISABLED (-)
C3 MULTI-P CAL
DISABLED
4. move down (with Enter) to C3.01.
C3.01 MULTI-P 1
10,0 KN 23,45 %
5. if needed change to next point by pressing Menu
6. press Enter
C3,01 MULTI-P 1
DELETE POINT
7. press Enter for deleting point. Averaging speed constants
Note: These settings must not normally be changed. We recommend contacting Consilium Marine &
Safety AB, navigation division, for advices before changing default values.
11 (16)
Consilium
4.
Art No. 703255D2

Check that the LPU2 enters normal operation mode and presents the correct speeds to different
users.
It should also be noted that there are numerous settings to be done on the LPU2 in order to configure
outputs etc. This is described in the LPU2 manual section of this manual.
4.1. System signal flow

The different sections of the manual covers installation and also describes testing procedures for each
sub-unit. Especially the section about the LPU2 (if this is included) contains useful information about
testing large installations.
If correct operation of all connected indicators and users (radar etc) was not verified during the tests
described in the previous sections, the following procedure can be used to verify signal flow
throughout the system:
a) On the STW part of the log, WTU: go to the menu for simulated speed using the Speed Log
Master Display and enter a value of +10 knots.
b) All connected indicators and/or display in LPU2 (if present) should display STW speed 10
knots ahead. If not, NMEA connection from ELC should be checked.
Also all connected external equipment (via relay or opto-coupler pulses or IEC 611621/NMEA 0183 serial data) should display STW speed 10 knots ahead.
c) Put the STW log back to normal operation mode.
d) Set the SOG unit to internal test mode by entering menu T1 in the SOG unit menu system. The
SOG part of the ELC now generates simulated speeds and depth according to T1
e) All connected indicators and/or display in LPU2 (if present) should display according to values
in menu T1. If not, NMEA connection from ELC should be checked. Also all connected
external equipment (via relay or opto-coupler pulses or IEC 61162-1/NMEA 0183 serial data)
should display these values.
f) Put the SOG log back to normal operation mode.
5.
Final inspection
When the system have passed all tests the protocol is signed with signature and date. One copy is
returned to Consilium Marine & Safety AB, navigation division, for reference purposes.
12 (16)
Consilium
6.
Art No. 703255D2
SAT protocol
Sea Acceptance Test for SAL T-Series

Order#:
SAL T-Series SAT
Owner:
Yard:
Ship:
Type:
TRU S/N:
ELC S/N:
Gyro S/N:
Indicators:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
Calibration
BT magnitude calibr
BT Angle calibration
WT Ballast 1 Condition
WT Full load Condition
WT Transducer Calibration
Comment
LPU2 S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
(single point calibrations)
%
degrees
(BALLAST 1 ??.??)
(BALLAST 2 ??.??)
(FULL LOAD ??.??)
(TC=???)
Result:
Passed
/ Failed
Date:
______________________
Sign: ________________________
(Consilium)
Date:
______________________
Sign: ________________________
13 (16)
Consilium
Art No. 703255D2
SAT protocol (copy for Consilium)

Sea Acceptance Test for SAL T-Series
Order#:
SAL T-Series SAT
Owner:
Yard:
Ship:
Type:
TRU S/N:
ELC S/N:
Gyro S/N:
Indicators:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
Calibration
BT magnitude calibr
WT Full load Condition
WT Transducer Calibration
Comment
LPU2 S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
(single point calibrations)
%
degrees
(BALLAST 1 ??.??)
(BALLAST 2 ??.??)
(FULL LOAD ??.??)
(TC=???)
Result:
Passed
/ Failed
Date:
______________________
Sign: ________________________
(Consilium)
Date:
______________________
Sign: ________________________
14 (16)
Consilium
7.
Art No. 703255D2
Sea Acceptance Test for SAL T-Series Multiple point calibration part
Order#:
SAL T-Series SAT
Comment
Owner:
Yard:
Ship:
Type:
TRU S/N:
ELC S/N:
LPU2 S/N:
Gyro S/N:
Indicators:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
Calibration
(Multi point calibrations)
BT magnitude calibr
%
degrees
WT C3.01 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.02 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.03 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.04 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.05 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.06 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.07 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.08 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.09 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.10 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
Result:
Passed
/ Failed
Date:
______________________
Sign: ________________________
(Consilium)
Date:
______________________
Sign: ________________________
15 (16)
Consilium
8.
Art No. 703255D2
Copy for Consilium Marine & Safety AB
Sea Acceptance Test for SAL T-Series Multiple point calibration part
Order#:
SAL T-Series SAT
Comment
Owner:
Yard:
Ship:
Type:
TRU S/N:
ELC S/N:
LPU2 S/N:
Gyro S/N:
Indicators:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
S/N:
Calibration
(Multi point calibrations)
BT magnitude calibr
%
degrees
WT C3.01 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.02 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.03 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.04 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.05 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.06 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.07 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.08 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.09 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
WT C3.10 Speed
% (??.??KN ?.??%)
Result:
Passed
/ Failed
Date:
______________________
Sign: ________________________
(Consilium)
Date:
______________________
Sign: ________________________
16 (16)

Manual Corredera

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Corredera

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Corredera

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Consilium

Order-specific pages, order #: ...................................

Art No. 702271 I1

Art No. 702271 I1

Art No. 702271 I1

Art No. 702271 I1

SAL T2 Acoustic Correlation Dual Speed Log

c) Longitudinal water track speed (= STW)

SD4 - Serial Digital Indicators

Optional indicators on Grey background

Art No. 702271 I1

Typical block diagram for a SAL T2, Docking configuration:

Optional indicators on Grey background .

Art No. 702271 I1

Art No. 702271 I1

2. List of a SAL T2 / SAL T2+ system

Items optional for a system

Bulhead mounting box SD4

Mounting Set Double Bottom w. Sea Valve (option)

Text for back of binder:

SAL T-series Technical Description

Art No. 702273C5

SPEED OVER GROUND MEASUREMENT

SPEED THROUGH WATER MEASUREMENT

WTU user interface

ELC - ELECTRONICS UNIT

SAL T-series Technical Description

Art No. 702273C5

Data transmission / reception

SAL T-series Technical Description

Art No. 702273C5

Speed over ground measurement

Bottom track transmission

Projected bottom area

SAL T-series Technical Description

Art No. 702273C5

Depth seek mode

2.2.2 Lock mode

SAL T-series Technical Description

Depth lock mode

Art No. 702273C5

SAL T-series Technical Description

Art No. 702273C5

Bottom track reception

Projected bottom area

SAL T-series Technical Description

Art No. 702273C5

SAL T-series Technical Description

Art No. 702273C5

SAL T-series Technical Description

Art No. 702273C5

SAL T-series Technical Description

Art No. 702273C5

SAL T-series Technical Description

Art No. 702273C5

Speed through water measurement

The transmit pulses

Figure: The transmit pulses

SAL T-series Technical Description

Art No. 702273C5